KYOCERA MA2600CWFX
KYOCERA ECOSYS MA2600cwfx Laser A4 1200 x 1200 DPI 26 ppm Wi-Fi View PDF
kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Operation Guide
ECOSYS MA2600cwfx ECOSYS MA2600cfx ECOSYS MA2600cwx
2024.07 C0DKDEN200
Contents
1
Please Read First......................................................................................1
Preface .......................................................................................................................................... 2
Machine Features ........................................................................................................................ 3
Optimize your office workflow ........................................................................................ 3
Save energy and cost ....................................................................................................... 5
Create attractive documents ........................................................................................... 6
Strengthen security .......................................................................................................... 7
Use functions more efficiently ........................................................................................ 9
Color and Image Quality Functions......................................................................................... 11
Basic Color Modes .......................................................................................................... 11
Adjusting Image Quality and Color .............................................................................. 12
Guides Provided with the Machine ......................................................................................... 14
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)................................................................................. 16
Structure of the guide .................................................................................................... 16
Conventions Used in This Guide ................................................................................... 17
Notice .......................................................................................................................................... 22
Safety Conventions in This Guide ................................................................................. 22
Environment .................................................................................................................... 23
Precautions for Use ........................................................................................................ 24
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)....................................................................................... 25
Laser Safety (Europe)...................................................................................................... 26
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power...................................... 27
Compliance and Conformity.......................................................................................... 28
Radio Tag Technology..................................................................................................... 30
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States).................................. 31
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................... 32
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ....................................................................... 33
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ............................................................................... 34
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) .................................. 35
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ................................................................... 36
Legal and Safety Information........................................................................................ 37
Energy Saving Control Function.................................................................................... 40
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ................................................................................. 41
Resource Saving - Paper ................................................................................................ 42
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"...................................................... 43
ENERGY STAR Program................................................................................................... 44
2
Installing and Setting up the Machine ...............................................45
Part Names (Machine Exterior)................................................................................................ 46
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)........................................................................................... 48
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)............................................................... 50
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ......................................................................... 51
Connecting Cables..................................................................................................................... 53
Connecting LAN Cable.................................................................................................... 53
Connecting USB Cable.................................................................................................... 54
Connecting the Power Cable ......................................................................................... 55
Power On/Off ............................................................................................................................. 56
Power on .......................................................................................................................... 56
Power off.......................................................................................................................... 57
Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 58
Operation Panel Keys ..................................................................................................... 58
Touch Panel ................................................................................................................................ 60
Using the Touch Panel.................................................................................................... 60
Home screen ................................................................................................................... 62
Display for Device Information ..................................................................................... 67
i
Display Setting Screen.................................................................................................... 68 Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set .............................................................................. 70 Help Screen...................................................................................................................... 72 Login/Logout.............................................................................................................................. 74 Login................................................................................................................................. 74 Simple Login .................................................................................................................... 75 Logout .............................................................................................................................. 76 Default Settings of the Machine .............................................................................................. 77 Setting Date and Time.................................................................................................... 77 Network Setup................................................................................................................. 78 Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 90 Quick Setup Wizard ................................................................................................................... 97 Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard.................................................................... 98 Installing Software ..................................................................................................................100 Published Software (Windows)....................................................................................100 Installing Software in Windows...................................................................................102 Using the web installer ................................................................................................104 Uninstalling Windows Software ..................................................................................110 Installing Software on a Mac OS Computer ..............................................................112 Setting TWAIN Driver....................................................................................................117 Setting WIA Driver ........................................................................................................119 Checking the Counter .............................................................................................................121 Additional Preparations for the Administrator ....................................................................122 Administrator Privileges Overview .............................................................................122 Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator ..................................................123 Strengthening the Security..........................................................................................124 Command Center RX...............................................................................................................126 Accessing Command Center RX ..................................................................................127 Changing Security Settings..........................................................................................128 Changing Device Information .....................................................................................129 SMTP and E-mail Settings ............................................................................................130 Registering Destinations..............................................................................................134 Transferring Data from Our Other Products........................................................................135 Migrating the Address Book........................................................................................135
3
Preparation before Use.......................................................................144
Load Paper ...............................................................................................................................145
Loading Paper ...............................................................................................................145
Precaution for Loading Paper .....................................................................................147
Paper Specifications available in the Cassettes ........................................................148
Loading in the Cassettes..............................................................................................149
Paper Specifications available in the Multipurpose Tray .........................................153
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ...................................................................154
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type.......................................................................156
Paper Stopper ..........................................................................................................................158
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .....................................159
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name.........................159
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name .............................................160
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder .................................161
Configuring Windows Firewall ....................................................................................166
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB..............................................................................171
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ....................................................................177
Adding a Destination (Address Book).........................................................................177
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key ...................................................................189
4
Print from PC ........................................................................................192
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ......................................................................................193
Displaying the Printer Driver Help..............................................................................194
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10)...................................195
ii
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 11)...................................196 Printing from PC ......................................................................................................................197
Printing on Standard Size Paper .................................................................................197 Printing on Non-standard Size Paper.........................................................................199 Printing with Universal Print .......................................................................................203 Canceling Printing from a Computer .........................................................................207 Printing from the Mobile Device............................................................................................208 Printing by AirPrint .......................................................................................................208 Printing by Mopria ........................................................................................................209 Printing with Wi-Fi Direct .............................................................................................210 Printing Data Saved in the Printer.........................................................................................211 Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ................................211 Printing Documents from Private Print Box ..............................................................212 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................213 Printing Document from Stored Job Box ...................................................................214 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ............................................215 Printing Document from Quick Copy Box..................................................................216 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ..........................................217 Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box...........................................................218 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box....................................219 Printing Documents from PIN Print Box....................................................................220 Deleting the Documents Stored in the PIN Print Box ..............................................221 Printing Document from Universal Print Box............................................................222 Deleting the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box ....................................224 Configure the Job Box ..................................................................................................225 Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)...................................................................226 Accessing the Status Monitor......................................................................................226 Exiting the Status Monitor ...........................................................................................227 Quick View State............................................................................................................228 Printing Progress Tab ...................................................................................................229 Paper Tray Status Tab ...................................................................................................230 Toner Status Tab............................................................................................................231 Alert Tab .........................................................................................................................232 Status Monitor Context Menu .....................................................................................233 Status Monitor Notification Settings ..........................................................................234
5
Operation on the Machine .................................................................236
Loading Originals ....................................................................................................................237
Placing Originals on the Platen...................................................................................237
Original Specifications available in the Document Processor.................................239
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites).................................................................242
Register Favorites (Wizard Mode) ...............................................................................244
Register Favorites (Program Mode)............................................................................245
Recalling Favorites (Program Mode) ..........................................................................246
Recalling Favorites (Wizard Mode)..............................................................................247
Editing Favorites ...........................................................................................................248
Deleting Favorites .........................................................................................................249
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ....................................250
Creating new shortcuts ................................................................................................250
Editing Shortcuts...........................................................................................................252
Deleting Shortcuts ........................................................................................................254
Copying ..................................................................................................................................... 256
Basic Operation.............................................................................................................256
Canceling Jobs ...............................................................................................................257
Basic Scanning (Sending)........................................................................................................258
Sending Document via E-mail ................................................................................................259
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................261
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ...........................................265
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA...............................................................................................268
Useful Sending Method ..........................................................................................................270
iii
WSD Scan..................................................................................................................................271 Install the Driver (for Windows 10) .............................................................................271 Install the Driver (for Windows 11) .............................................................................272 Executing WSD scan .....................................................................................................273
Scanning with FMU Connection.............................................................................................275 Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)................................................277
Sending to different types of destinations ................................................................277 Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself).............................279 Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) .....................................................................280 Canceling Sending Jobs ..........................................................................................................282 Handling Destination ..............................................................................................................283
Specifying Destination .................................................................................................283 Choosing from the Address Book ...............................................................................284 Choosing from One Touch Key....................................................................................286 Choosing from the Search (No.)..................................................................................287 Checking and Editing Destinations.............................................................................288 Confirmation Screen of Destinations .........................................................................289 Re-entering the New Destination ...............................................................................290 Recall ..............................................................................................................................291 How to use the FAX Function .................................................................................................292 Using Document Boxes ..........................................................................................................293 What is Job Box? ............................................................................................................293 What is USB Drive Box? ................................................................................................294 What is a Fax Memory RX Box/Subaddress Box/Polling Box?.................................295 Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself) ..................296 Using Removable USB Drive ..................................................................................................297 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive ..............................................297 Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB).........................................................299 Check the USB Drive Information ...............................................................................301 Removing USB Drive.....................................................................................................302
6
Using Various Functions .....................................................................303
About Functions Available on the Machine..........................................................................304
Copy ................................................................................................................................ 304
Send ................................................................................................................................ 307
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)...............................................................310
Functions ..................................................................................................................................313
Original Size...................................................................................................................313
Paper Selection .............................................................................................................315
Mixed Size Originals .....................................................................................................317
Original Orientation .....................................................................................................319
Collate............................................................................................................................. 320
ID Card Copy..................................................................................................................321
Density ...........................................................................................................................322
Original Image ..............................................................................................................323
EcoPrint ..........................................................................................................................326
Color Selection ..............................................................................................................327
Color Balance ................................................................................................................328
Hue Adjustment ............................................................................................................329
Sharpness ......................................................................................................................331
Background Density Adj...............................................................................................332
Saturation ......................................................................................................................333
Prevent Bleed-thru........................................................................................................334
Contrast.......................................................................................................................... 335
Erase Colors ...................................................................................................................336
Zoom ..............................................................................................................................337
Combine ......................................................................................................................... 340
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan.........................................................................343
Duplex ............................................................................................................................346
Continuous Scan ...........................................................................................................350
iv
Job Finish Notice............................................................................................................351 File Name Entry .............................................................................................................352 Priority Override............................................................................................................353 Detect Folded Corner Orig...........................................................................................354 Skip Blank Page.............................................................................................................355 Duplex ............................................................................................................................356 Sending Size ..................................................................................................................357 File format......................................................................................................................359 File Separation...............................................................................................................365 Scan Resolution, Resolution ........................................................................................366 Clarify Text (Noise Removal) ........................................................................................367 Email Subject/Body .......................................................................................................368 FTP Encrypted TX ..........................................................................................................369 Email Encrypted TX .......................................................................................................370 Digital Signature to Email ............................................................................................371 Storing Size ....................................................................................................................373 Encrypted PDF Password .............................................................................................375 JPEG/TIFF Print...............................................................................................................376 XPS Fit to Page...............................................................................................................377
7
Status/Job Cancel.................................................................................378
Checking Job Status.................................................................................................................379
Displaying Status Screens............................................................................................379
Details of the Status Screens .......................................................................................380
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ......................................................................386
Checking Job History ...............................................................................................................387
Displaying Job History Screen .....................................................................................387
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories .......................................................388
Sending the Log History...............................................................................................389
Job Operation ...........................................................................................................................390
Pause and Resumption of Jobs ...................................................................................390
Canceling of Jobs...........................................................................................................391
Device Information..................................................................................................................392
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper .......................................................394
8
System Menu........................................................................................395
Operation Method...................................................................................................................396
System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................398
Device Settings ........................................................................................................................403
Language/System of Units ..........................................................................................403
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................404
Date/Time ......................................................................................................................405
Energy Saver/Timer ......................................................................................................406
Display Settings.............................................................................................................409
Sound .............................................................................................................................410
Original/Scan Settings..................................................................................................411
Paper Feeding ...............................................................................................................413
Operation Assist............................................................................................................420
Error Handling...............................................................................................................421
Toner Settings ...............................................................................................................422
Notification/Report.................................................................................................................. 423
Print Report/List ............................................................................................................423
Result Report Setting....................................................................................................425
Low Toner Alert .............................................................................................................426
Fax Communication Report .........................................................................................427
Sending Log History .....................................................................................................428
FunctionSettings ...................................................................................................................... 430
Function Defaults..........................................................................................................430
Copy/Print ......................................................................................................................436
v
Send/Store .....................................................................................................................437 Email ...............................................................................................................................439 Sending Job - Folder......................................................................................................441 Fax................................................................................................................................... 442 WSD ................................................................................................................................443 Address Book.................................................................................................................444 One-Touch Key ..............................................................................................................445 Send and Forward.........................................................................................................446 Forward setting .............................................................................................................447 Printer............................................................................................................................. 448 Job Box ...........................................................................................................................452 Cloud Access Setting ....................................................................................................453 Subaddress Box.............................................................................................................454 Fax Memory RX Box......................................................................................................455 Home ..............................................................................................................................456 Status .............................................................................................................................. 457 Remote Services............................................................................................................458 TWAIN/WIA ....................................................................................................................459 Network Settings .....................................................................................................................460 Host Name .....................................................................................................................460 Proxy ............................................................................................................................... 461 Wi-Fi Direct Settings......................................................................................................462 Wi-Fi Settings .................................................................................................................464 Wired Network Settings ...............................................................................................470 Protocol Settings...........................................................................................................475 Ping ................................................................................................................................. 481 Bonjour........................................................................................................................... 482 IP Filter (IPv4).................................................................................................................483 IP Filter (IPv6).................................................................................................................484 IPSec ...............................................................................................................................485 Restart the network ......................................................................................................486 Connectivity ...................................................................................................................487 Others............................................................................................................................. 488 Security Settings ......................................................................................................................489 Security Quick Setup.....................................................................................................489 Configuring Security Quick Setup...............................................................................490 Interface Block Setting .................................................................................................491 Device Security Settings ..............................................................................................492 Authentication Security................................................................................................497 Unknown User Settings ...............................................................................................498 Network.......................................................................................................................... 499 Job Accounting/Authentication..............................................................................................500 Add/Delete Application...........................................................................................................501 Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 502 Image Adjustment ........................................................................................................502 Others............................................................................................................................. 513
9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting) ..........................................................................................519
Overview of User Login Administration................................................................................520
Managing the Job Account from PC ...........................................................................520
Enable User Login Administration.........................................................................................522
Setting User Login Administration ........................................................................................523
Authentication Security................................................................................................523
Adding a User (Local User List) ...................................................................................525
Changing User Properties ...........................................................................................528
Deleting a User..............................................................................................................530
Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC ....................................531
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN................................................................533
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ....................................................................534
vi
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC.......................................................535 Local Authorization.......................................................................................................536 Server Settings ..............................................................................................................537 Configure Network User Rights ..................................................................................538 Group Authorization Settings......................................................................................539 Guest Authorization Settings ......................................................................................542 Obtain NW User Property ............................................................................................545 Simple Login Settings...................................................................................................547 ID Card Settings ............................................................................................................550 PIN Login........................................................................................................................553 Using User Login Administration................................................................................554 Overview of Job Accounting ...................................................................................................555 Enabling Job Accounting.........................................................................................................557 Job Accounting (Local).............................................................................................................558 Adding an Account........................................................................................................558 Restricting the Use of the Machine ............................................................................559 Editing an Account........................................................................................................561 Deleting an Account .....................................................................................................562 Job Accounting for Printing .........................................................................................563 Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .......................................................................565 Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ............................................................................566 Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .....................................567 Configuring Job Accounting ...................................................................................................568 Default Counter Limit ...................................................................................................568 Counting the Number of Pages Printed ....................................................................570 Print Accounting Report...............................................................................................572 Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................573 Apply Limit .....................................................................................................................575 Copier/Printer Count ....................................................................................................576 Unknown User Settings ...............................................................................................577
10
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................579
Regular Maintenance..............................................................................................................580
Cleaning .........................................................................................................................580
Cleaning Platen .............................................................................................................581
Cleaning Slit Glass.........................................................................................................582
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit ......................................................................................583
Replacing the Toner Container....................................................................................584
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................588
Solving Malfunctions ....................................................................................................588
Machine Operation Trouble.........................................................................................589
Printed Image Trouble .................................................................................................635
Color Printing Trouble ..................................................................................................651
Remote Operation ........................................................................................................657
Responding to Messages.............................................................................................660
List of Transmission Error Codes ................................................................................729
Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 783
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................783
Color Registration Procedure ......................................................................................784
Perform image adjustment .........................................................................................788
Clearing Paper Jams ................................................................................................................789
Jam Location Indicators ...............................................................................................789
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray.............................................791
Remove any jammed papers in Cassette 1 ...............................................................793
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 .................................................................794
Remove the paper jammed in the Rear Cover 1.......................................................796
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) ....799
vii
11
Appendix...............................................................................................801
Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................802
Option configuration ....................................................................................................802
Overview of the Applications .................................................................................................803
Starting Application Use ..............................................................................................803
Checking Details of Application ..................................................................................804
Character Entry Method .........................................................................................................805
Entry Screens.................................................................................................................805
Entering Characters......................................................................................................808
About Paper .............................................................................................................................809
Basic Paper Specifications ...........................................................................................809
Choosing the Appropriate Paper ................................................................................810
Special Paper .................................................................................................................814
Specifications ...........................................................................................................................824
Machine .......................................................................................................................... 824
Copy Functions..............................................................................................................826
Printer Function ............................................................................................................827
Scanner Functions ........................................................................................................828
Document Processor ....................................................................................................829
Paper Feeder (250-sheet).............................................................................................830
Backing up your data ..............................................................................................................831
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer ...................................................831
Backing up your data using Command Center RX ...................................................832
Security Quick Setup Function List ........................................................................................833
TLS................................................................................................................................... 833
Serverside Settings .......................................................................................................834
Clientside Settings ........................................................................................................835
IPv4 Settings (Wired Network) ....................................................................................836
IPv4 Settings (Wireless Network) ................................................................................837
IPv6 Settings (Wired Network) ....................................................................................838
IPv6 Settings (Wireless Network) ................................................................................839
Send Protocols: FTP Client (Transmission) .................................................................840
Other Protocols: HTTP (Client).....................................................................................841
Other Protocols: SOAP..................................................................................................842
Other Protocols: LDAP..................................................................................................843
Send Protocols: SMTP (E-mail TX)................................................................................844
Email: POP3 User Settings ...........................................................................................845
Print protocols...............................................................................................................846
Send Protocol ................................................................................................................848
Other Protocols .............................................................................................................849
TCP/IP: Bonjour Settings ..............................................................................................851
Network Settings ..........................................................................................................852
Connectivity ...................................................................................................................853
Interface Block Setting .................................................................................................854
Energy Saver/Timer ......................................................................................................855
User Account Lockout Setting .....................................................................................856
Job Status/Job Logs Settings........................................................................................857
Edit Restriction ..............................................................................................................858
Prevent Mis-sending Settings......................................................................................859
viii
Please Read First
1 Please Read First
Preface .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Machine Features ........................................................................................................................ 3 Color and Image Quality Functions......................................................................................... 11 Guides Provided with the Machine ......................................................................................... 14 About the Operation Guide (this Guide)................................................................................. 16 Notice .......................................................................................................................................... 22
1
Please Read First > Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition. Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine. The product illustrations, screens, settings, etc., in this guide may differ depending on the machine you are using.
We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing, to maintain quality.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure. We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third-party supplies in this machine. A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number before contacting your service representative.
2
Please Read First > Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions. Using Various Functions (page 303) Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used functions with just one touch (Favorites)
You can preset frequently used functions. Once you register frequently used settings as favorite, you can call up the settings easily. Using this favorite brings the same results even if operated by another person.
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) (page 242)
Scan originals of different sizes at a time (Mixed Size Originals)
It is useful when preparing conference materials. You can set the different sized originals at one time so you don't need to reset the originals regardless of size.
Mixed Size Originals (page 317)
Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and produce as one job (Continuous Scan)
It is useful when preparing many-page handouts. When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied or sent as one job.
Continuous Scan (page 350)
3
Please Read First > Machine Features
Send one time with multiple sending options (Multi Sending)
You can send the same document to the multiple destinations using a different method. You can specify multiple destinations of different send methods such as Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), and Fax. You can reduce your workflow by sending a job at once.
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 277)
Save frequently used documents in the machine
You can save the frequently used document in the machine and print it when needed.
Using Document Boxes (page 293)
4
Please Read First > Machine Features
Save energy and cost
Save energy as needed (Energy Saver function)
The machine is equipped with Energy Saver function that automatically switches the machine into Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate Energy Saver Recovery Level depending on the operation.
Energy Saver function (page 90)
Printing with reduced toner consumption (EcoPrint)
You can save toner consumption with this function. When you only need to check the printed content, such as a trial print run or documents for internal confirmation, use this function to save toner. Use this function when a high-quality print is not required.
EcoPrint (page 326)
Reduce paper use (Paper Saving Printing)
You can print originals on both sides of the paper. You can also print multiple originals onto one sheet.
Combine (page 340) Duplex (page 346)
Skip blank pages when printing (Skip Blank Page)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank.
Skip Blank Page (page 355)
5
Please Read First > Machine Features
Create attractive documents
Prevent image bleed-thru (Prevent Bleed-thru)
You can prevent image bleed-through from the reverse side when scanning thin originals. Prevent Bleed-thru (page 334)
6
Please Read First > Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file (PDF Encryption Functions)
Use the PDF format's password security options to restrict document viewing, printing and editing.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 360)
Prevent loss of finished documents (Private Print)
Temporarily saving print jobs in the main unit document box and outputting them when in front of the device can prevent documents from being taken by others.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 212)
Log in by ID card (Card Authentication)
You can log in simply by touching an ID card. You don't need to enter your user name and password.
Card Authentication Kit(B) AC <IC card authentication kit (Activate)> (page 802)
Strengthen security (Settings for Administrator)
Various functions are available for administrators to strengthen security.
Strengthening the Security (page 124)
7
Please Read First > Machine Features
Prevent the execution of malware (Allowlisting)
Prevent malware from running and prevent software tampering and maintain system reliability. Device Security Settings (page 492)
8
Please Read First > Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Make the machine quiet (Quiet Mode)
You can make the machine quiet by reducing its running noise.
Quiet Mode
Install the machine without concerning the network cables (Wireless Network)
(Machine equipped with Wi-Fi module) If there is a wireless LAN environment, it is possible to install the unit without worrying about the network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are supported.
Configuring the Wireless Network (page 80)
Use USB drive(USB Drive)
It is useful when you need to print documents outside your office or you cannot print documents from your PC. You can print the document from the USB drive by plugging it directly into the machine. Original scanned at the machine can be saved in the USB drive also.
Using Removable USB Drive (page 297) Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB) (page 299)
Specify image file format (File Format)
You can select the various file formats when sending/storing images.
File format (page 359)
9
Please Read First > Machine Features
Perform remote operation (Command Center RX)
You can access to the machine remotely to print, send or download data. Administrators can configure the machine behavior or management settings. Command Center RX (page 126)
10
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
The basic color modes are as follows.
Auto Color
Automatically recognizes whether a document being scanned is color or black & white.
Reference Image
Before
After
Full Color
Scans the document in full color. Reference Image
Before
Grayscale
Scans a document in grayscale. Reference Image
Before
Black & White
Scans the document in black and white. Reference Image
Before
For details, refer to the following. Color Selection (page 327)
11
After After After
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color
To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
Adjust the color precisely
I want to... Adjust the density.
Sample image (before)
Sample image (after)
Function Density
Adjust the color by strengthening blue or red tones.
Example: Strengthening red
Change the image by individually adjusting each of the six colors: red, blue, green, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Example: Changing red tones close to yellow to yellow, and cyan tones close to blue to blue
Adjust the saturation.
Color Balance Hue Adjustment
Saturation
For details, refer to the following: Density (page 322) Color Balance (page 328) Hue Adjustment (page 329) Saturation (page 333)
Adjust the image quality precisely
I want to...
Emphasize or blur the image outline. Example: Emphasize the image outlines
Adjust the difference between dark and light parts of the image.
Sample image (before)
Sample image (after)
Function Sharpness
Contrast
12
Please Read First > Color and Image Quality Functions
I want to...
Darken or lighten the background (the area with no texts or images) of a document.
Example: Lightening the background
Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided originals.
Sample image (before)
For details, refer to the following: Sharpness (page 331) Contrast (page 335) Background Density Adj. (page 332) Prevent Bleed-thru (page 334)
Adjust the scanned image
I want to...
Sample image (before)
Decrease the file size and produce the characters clearly.
For details, refer to the following: File format (page 359)
Sample image (after)
Function Background Density
Prevent Bleed-thru
Sample image (after)
Function
File format [High Comp. PDF]
13
Please Read First > Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed. The guides can be downloaded from the Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). To view the guides on a computer, Adobe Reader Version 8.0 or later needs to be installed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine performance.
To set up the machine:
Start using the machine quickly
For safe use of the machine
Use the machine to its fullest Use the fax functions Use the ID card Strengthen security Easily register machine information and configure settings Print data from a computer
Setup Guide
Explains the setup procedure to follow in order to print with this machine.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Quick Guide
Explains frequently-used operations and what to do when problems occur.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Safety Guide (ECOSYS MA2600cwfx/ ECOSYS MA2600cfx/ ECOSYS MA2600cwx)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
This printed guide is provided together with the machine.
Operation Guide (this guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates default settings and other information.
FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Data Encryption/Overwrite Operation Guide
Explains how to introduce and use the Data Encryption/Overwrite Function, and how to overwrite and encrypt data.
Command Center RX User Guide
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and change settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
14
Please Read First > Guides Provided with the Machine
Monitor the machine and printers on the network Scan images and save with information Print without using the printer driver
Directly print a PDF file
Adjust the print or scan position
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net Viewer.
File Management Utility User Guide Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save scanned documents.
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.
KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Maintenance Menu User Guide Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other settings
15
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Please Read First
Installing and Setting up the Machine Preparation before Use
Print from PC Operation on the Machine
Using Various Functions Status/Job Cancel
System Menu User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) Troubleshooting
Appendix
Contents
Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.
Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such as how to load paper and create an address book.
Explains the basic printing method.
Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
Explains user login and job accounting.
Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other problem occurs.
Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.
16
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader is used as an example in the explanations below.
1 Click an item in the Table of Contents to jump to the corresponding page.
2 Indicates operational requirements and restrictions to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
3 Indicates supplemental explanations and reference information for operations.
4 Click the underlined text to jump to the corresponding page.
5 Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
Convention [ ] " "
Indicates keys and buttons. Indicates a message.
Description
17
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in Procedures for Operating the Machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Actual procedure
1 Press the [System Menu/Counter] key. 2 Select [DeviceSettings]. 3 Move the screen downwards (i.e. swiping) 4 Select [Sound].
Procedure indicated in this guide
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Sound]
Actual procedure
1 Select [Job Accounting/Authentic.].
2 Select [Job Accounting] from "Job Accounting Setting".
18
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Procedure indicated in this guide
[Job Accounting/Authentic.] > "Job Accounting Setting" [Job Accounting] For details on touch panel operation, refer to the following: Using the Touch Panel (page 60)
19
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Size of Paper
Paper sizes such as A5 can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation.
Set the paper in vertical orientation
When loading in a cassette
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5-R
When loading in the multipurpose tray
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5-R
Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and paper feeder unit. For details, refer to the following.
Set the paper in horizontal orientation
When loading in a cassette
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5
When loading in the multipurpose tray
Setting Position (X=Width, Y=Length)
Icon on the touch panel
Indicated size in this Guide A5
20
Please Read First > About the Operation Guide (this Guide) Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and paper feeder unit. For details, refer to the following. Specifications (page 824)
21
Please Read First > Notice
Notice
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol.
[General warning] [Warning of high temperature] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol. [Warning of prohibited action] [Disassembly prohibited] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol. [Alert of required action] [Remove the power plug from the outlet] [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
22
Please Read First > Notice
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Temperature Humidity
10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).
10 to 80% But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. · Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight. · Avoid locations with vibrations. · Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations. · Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. · Avoid poorly ventilated locations. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
23
Please Read First > Notice
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children. If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. · If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large
amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician. · If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician. · If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician. · If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water. Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
24
Please Read First > Notice
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. The position of the rating label is show below.
Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
25
Please Read First > Notice
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine. This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014. Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
26
Please Read First > Notice
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
27
Please Read First > Notice
Compliance and Conformity
Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type ECOSYS MA2600cwfx, ECOSYS MA2600cfx, and ECOSYS MA2600cwx are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html
NOTE Use shielded interface cables.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: · Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. · Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. · Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. · Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. · The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20 cm between the radiator & your body.
Industry Canada statement:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s) / receiver(s) that complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1 This device may not cause interference. 2 This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter. Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B * The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada. NOTE -- Use shielded interface cables.
28
Please Read First > Notice
Caution:
The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems; Operations in the 5.25-5.35GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only.
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with Canada radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. * These above statements are valid in the United States of America, Canada and EU.
29
Please Read First > Notice
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
30
Please Read First > Notice
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
31
Please Read First > Notice
Warranty (the United States and Canada)
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new color Multifunctional Product (referred to as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 100,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights, which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008 Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, Canada
32
Please Read First > Notice
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned. · Paper money · Bank note · Securities · Stamp · Passport · Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
33
Please Read First > Notice
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions: (1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
34
Please Read First > Notice
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable, which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can be transmitted. On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the following communication contents. · Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers · Contents of email messages
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the following illegal actions. · Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak) · Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized
information (spoofing) · Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification) · Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction) Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when the product is used. We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the security settings.
35
Please Read First > Notice
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
(Machine equipped with Wi-Fi module) · Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in
a medical institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments. · Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment. · If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a fail-safe design and redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
Sólo México (Mexico only)
Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo LBWA1ZZ1CA para conectarse a las redes Inalámbricas.
36
Please Read First > Notice
Legal and Safety Information
Unauthorized reproduction (copying) of all or part of this document is prohibited, with the exception of copyright law exceptions.
Regarding Trade Names
· PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. · KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. · Active Directory, Azure, Excel, Microsoft, Microsoft 365, Microsoft Edge, PowerPoint, Windows and Windows
Server are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. · PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. · Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Inc. in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. · Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. · IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. · AppleTalk, Bonjour, Mac, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc. · Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH. · ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation. · ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries. · UFST TM MicroType ® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine. · iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. · AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc. · iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by Apple Inc. · Google is trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC. · Mopria TM is registered trademarks of Mopria TM Alliance. · Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. · RealVNC, VNC and RFB are registered trademarks of RealVNC Ltd. in the U.S. and in other countries. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. Neither TM nor ® will be specified in the main text.
37
Please Read First > Notice
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance
with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded. 8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces. 9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. 10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. 11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c) (1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2). 12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
38
Please Read First > Notice
OpenSSL License
For the Open Source Software license, go into the following URL and select Country > Product Name > OS > Language and then, refer to the "OSS_Notice" from the manual tab in the Download. https://kyocera.info/
39
Please Read First > Notice
Energy Saving Control Function
To reduce power consumption when idle, the device comes equipped with a power management function that automatically shifts to "Sleep" to minimize power consumption after a certain period of time has passed since the device was last used. Sleep (page 90) Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 96)
40
Please Read First > Notice
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. Duplex (page 346) Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
41
Please Read First > Notice
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognized ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or an equivalent quality standard, be used. This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to further saving of forest resources. * : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes" Contact your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
42
Please Read First > Notice
Environmental benefits of "Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time. Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.
43
Please Read First > Notice
ENERGY STAR Program
We participate in the ENERGY STAR® Program. We provide the products that comply with ENERGY STAR standards to the market. ENERGY STAR is an energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing the products that comply with ENERGY STAR, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and cut energy-related costs.
44
Installing and Setting up the Machine
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
Part Names (Machine Exterior)................................................................................................ 46 Part Names (Connectors/Interior)........................................................................................... 48 Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)............................................................... 50 Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ......................................................................... 51 Connecting Cables..................................................................................................................... 53 Power On/Off ............................................................................................................................. 56 Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 58 Touch Panel ................................................................................................................................ 60 Login/Logout.............................................................................................................................. 74 Default Settings of the Machine .............................................................................................. 77 Quick Setup Wizard ................................................................................................................... 97 Installing Software ..................................................................................................................100 Checking the Counter .............................................................................................................121 Additional Preparations for the Administrator ....................................................................122 Command Center RX...............................................................................................................126 Transferring Data from Our Other Products........................................................................135
45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)
1 Document processor 2 Inner tray 3 Paper stopper 4 Cassette 1 5 Power Switch 6 Button (Right Cover Open) 7 USB Memory Slot 8 Right Cover 9 Original Stopper (Not supported in some regions) 10 Original Eject Table 11 Original Table 12 Original Width Guide 13 Pet Film 14 Handles 15 Operation Panel 16 Platen 17 Original Size Indicator Plates
46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior) 18 Handles 19 Anti-theft Lock Slot 20 Rear Cover 1
47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1 TEL Connector 2 LINE Connector 3 USB Interface Connector 4 Network Interface Connector 5 Feed Cover 6 Paper Length Guide 7 Paper Width Guides 8 Multipurpose Tray 9 Tray Extension 10 Paper Width Guides 11 Fuser cover
48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
12 Toner Container (Yellow) 13 Toner Container (Magenta) 14 Toner Container (Cyan) 15 Toner Container (Black) 16 Toner Container Lock Lever
49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
1 Cassette 2 2 Rear Cover 2 For details of options, refer to the following: Option configuration (page 802)
50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
NOTE If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following. Configuring the Wireless Network (page 80)
Cables that Can Be Used
When a network cable is used to connect the machine
Function Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*2
Necessary Cable LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)
51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
When a USB cable is used to connect the machine
Function
Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA)
USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, max. 5.0 m, shielded)
*2 The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. For more information on Network FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
IMPORTANT Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 57)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network. Network Setup (page 78)
53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting USB Cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 57)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2 Power on the machine.
54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables
Connecting the Power Cable
1 Connect the cable to the machine. Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet. IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power on
1 Turn the power switch on.
IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch.
56
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power off
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed. It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT · If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power
switch disables fax transmission and reception. · Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
57
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Operation Panel Keys
1 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
2 [Status/Job Cancel] key Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
3 [System Menu/Counter] key Displays the System Menu/Counter screen.
4 Touch panel This is a touch panel. Touch this key to make each settings.
5 [Processing] indicator Blinks while printing or TX processing. And lights up when there is a reserved job.
6 [Memory ] indicator Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory.
7 [Attention] indicator Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
8 [Enter] key Confirms the manually entered values. Operates linked with the on-screen [OK].
9 [Start ] key Starts Copy, Scan, and sets the operation processes while the LED light is solid.
10 [Stop ] key Suspends the printing job in operation.
11 [Quiet mode] key Switching button for silent mode.
12 [Authentication/Logout] key Authentication of the switching users and finish operation of each user (Log out).
58
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel 13 [Energy Saver] key
Make this main unit into the Sleep Mode condition. Recovers from the Sleep Mode in case of the sleep mode condition. 14 [Reset] key Return settings to the default condition. 15 [Clear] key Clears entered numbers and characters. 16 [Quick No. Search] key Specifies registered information such as address numbers and user IDs by number. 17 Numeric key Call the numeric key board when inputting the number or the symbol.
59
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Touch Panel
Using the Touch Panel
This section explains the basic operation of the touch panel.
Tapping
This is the operation used to select an icon or key. In this guide, the tap operation is expressed as "select."
Popover
Tap the icons and keys to display detailed information on the icons and menus. A popover displays information and menus without switching between screens.
Swiping
This is the operation used to switch between screens and to display items that are not displayed in the list. Move in one direction as if tracing on the screen. The figure shown below is an example of swiping Home Screen. Move the screen to the left and right.
60
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel The figure shown below is an example of swiping System Menu Screen. Move the screen up and down.
61
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Home screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the corresponding screen. You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background. Editing the Home Screen (page 64)
The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.
No.
Item
1 Status Area
2 Taskbar
3 Desktop
4 Screen-switching keys
Description
Displays the messages and status icons for the current status. Displays the logged-in user name when user login administration is enabled.
Displays task icons. If an error occurs, the [Status/Job Cancel] icon "!" will show. Once the error clears, the display will return to normal.
Displays the application icons. Also displays registered favorite features. Icons that are not displayed on the first page will appear by changing the page.
Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.
NOTE It is also possible to use swiping to switch between displays. Using the Touch Panel (page 60)
5 [...]
6 [Login]/[Logout] 7 Remaining amount of
toner
Displays every task icons including the icons displayed in a taskbar area in a popover.
Logs in or logs out when user login administration is enabled.
Displays the remaining amount of toner. Select this icon to display details of the remaining amount of toner in a popover.
62
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
No.
Item
8 Sub status icons
Status icon (Wi-Fi)
Status icon (Security level: Low) Status icon (Remote operation) Status icon (FAX Memory RX Box capacity)
Status icon (USB drive)
Description
Displays the icons that indicate the status of the machine. Five icons can be displayed. Select this area to display the icon information in a popover. The icon " " is displayed when Wi-Fi is connected. When Wi-Fi is not connected, " " is displayed. " " is displayed when the security level is set at [Low].
" " is displayed when using the remote operation.
" " is displayed when the capacity of the FAX Memory RX Box is 10% or less. " " is displayed when a USB drive is connected to this machine. Tapping the USB drive icon and selecting [Remove USB] allows you to safely remove the USB drive.
63
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Editing the Home Screen
You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Home]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Configure the function. The following settings can be configured. Customize Desktop Specify the function icons to display on the desktop. Displays function icons including the installed applications and the functions that can be used when options are installed. Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the functions to display. Select [Filter] to narrow down the functions by application and favorites. Select the function to display and [OK]. Select an icon and [Previous] or [Next] to change the display position of the selected icon on the Desktop. To delete an icon from the desktop, select the desired one and select [Delete]. Customize Taskbar Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar. Select [Taskbar Button 1]. Select the function to display and [OK]. One task icon can be displayed.
NOTE Functions that are hidden can be displayed by selecting [...] (popover icon) on the right end of the taskbar. Taskbar buttons for which [None] has been selected will not be displayed. Other taskbar buttons will be displayed from left to right.
Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen. Value: Images 1 to 8
64
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
Function
Icon
Description
Copy*1
Send*1
Fax Server*2
Fax*3
Job Box*5
USB Drive*1
Subaddress Box*3 Polling Box*3
Fax Memory RX Box*3
Displays the Copy screen. Basic Operation (page 256) Displays the Send screen. Basic Scanning (Sending) (page 258) Displays the Fax Server Send screen. Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) (page 280) Displays the Fax screen. FAX Operation Guide Displays the Job Box screen. Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 211) Displays the USB Drive screen. Using Removable USB Drive (page 297) Displays the Subaddress Box screen. FAX Operation Guide Displays the Polling Box screen. FAX Operation Guide Displays the Fax Memory RX Box screen. FAX Operation Guide
Send to Me (Email)*4
Favorites
Displays the Send screen. The E-mail address of the logged-in user is set as the destination.
Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself) (page 279)
Calls up the registered favorite. The icon will change according to the function of the favorite.
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) (page 242)
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory. *2 This is displayed when the external server (Fax Server) is set. *3 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. *4 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
65
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Available Functions to Display on Taskbar
Function
Icon
Description
Status/Job Cancel*1 Device Information*1
Network Settings Language*1
Paper Settings*1 Wi-Fi Direct*2
Help
User Property
Incoming Fax Log*3 Outgoing Fax Log*3 System Menu
Counter
Favorites
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
Displays the Device Information screen. Check the system and network information, and information on the options that are used. It is also possible to print various reports and lists. Display for Device Information (page 67) Displays the Network settings screen in System Menu. Network Settings (page 460) Displays the Language setting screen in System Menu. Language/System of Units (page 403) Displays the Paper setting screen in System Menu. Paper Feeding (page 413) Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of information relating to the machine that can use the network appears. Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 87) Displays the Help screen. Help Screen (page 72) Displays the User Property screen. Changing User Properties (page 528) Displays the Incoming Fax Log screen. FAX Operation Guide Displays the Outgoing Fax Log screen. FAX Operation Guide Displays the System Menu screen. Operation Method (page 396) Displays the Counter screen. Checking the Counter (page 121) Displays the favorite list screen. Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) (page 242)
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory. *2 Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed. *3 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
66
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Display for Device Information
Shows Device Information. It is possible to check the status of the system and network, the status of consumables such as toner and paper and the situation of the options being used. It is also possible to print various reports and lists.
1 [Home] key > [DeviceInformation] 2 Check the Device Information.
[Identification/Wired Network] You can check ID information such as the model name, serial number, host name and location, and the IP address of the wired network.
[Wi-Fi Direct/Wi-Fi] You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the device name, network name and IP address. Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
[Supplies/Paper] You can check the availability of toner and paper.
[Fax] You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax ID and other fax information. This item is displayed only for fax-compatible machines.
[USB/Bluetooth] You can check the connection status of USB drive and Bluetooth keyboard.
[Option/Application] You can check information on the options and applications that are used.
[Capability/Version] You can check the software version and performance.
[Security] You can check the security information on the machine.
[Report] You can print various reports and lists.
[Remote Operation Status] You can check the status of remote operation.
67
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Display Setting Screen
The following procedure is an example of the Copy screen.
1 Body Displays various Task screen functions.
2 Arrow Button Move the screen up and down.
To configure the settings for functions, select the Paper Settings. Select the Arrow Button to display the following functions.
When an On/Off Flip switch is displayed for a function, select the switch to change between ON and OFF.
68
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
69
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-selectable state.
Normal
Grayed out
In the following cases, the key is grayed out and cannot be selected. · Cannot be used in combination with a feature that is already selected. · Use prohibited by user control. · For functions that cannot be changed when using proof copy.
70
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Normal
Hidden
Cannot be used because an option is not installed. Example) The [Subaddress Box] is displayed only for fax-compatible models.
NOTE · If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this
case, select the [Reset] key and try again. · If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from
using the function by user login administration. Check with the administrator of the machine. · If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this
case, select the [Reset] key and try again. · If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from
using the function by user login administration. Check with the administrator of the machine.
71
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel. Select [Help] on the Home screen to show the Help list.
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Help]
2 Select the items to check from the list.
72
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel
1 Help titles 2 Displays information about functions and machine operation. 3 Closes the Help screen and returns to the original screen.
73
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
Login
1 Enter the login user name and login password to login. If this screen is displayed during operations, enter the login user name and login password.
1 If the user authentication method is set to [Network Authentication], the authentication destination is displayed. Select [Local] or [Network] for the authentication destination.
2 Enter the login user name. NOTE
If you do not know your login User Name, please contact your Administrator. 3 Enter the login password.
Character Entry Method (page 805) NOTE
If you do not know your login Password, please contact your Administrator. 4 Select [Simple Login], [PIN Login], or [ID Card Login] as the login method.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 519) 5 Check the Wi-Fi Direct environment. 6 Refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. Displayed when job
accounting is enabled.
2 Select [Login].
74
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Simple Login
1 If the following screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
NOTE If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
75
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout
Logout
1 Select [Logout]. Return to the login user name/login password entry screen.
NOTE Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances: · When the machine enters the sleep state. · When the auto panel reset function is activated. · When you select the [Authentication/Logout] key on the operation panel.
76
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.
NOTE For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following: System Menu (page 395)
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE · To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
Date/Time (page 405) · The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Date/Time]
2 Configure the settings. Select and set [Time Zone] > [Date and Time] > [Date Format] in this order. [Time Zone] Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time. [Date and Time] Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as Email, the date and time set on the machine will be displayed on the header. Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (0 to 23), Minute (0 to 59), Second (0 to 59) [Date Format] Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Value: [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], [YYYY/MM/DD]
77
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Network Setup
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Mac, UNIX and other platforms. The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Configuring Connections on the Web Page
Description
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-style screen, without setting individually in System menu. Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard (page 98) Use Wired Network Settings or Optional Network to configure the network in details from System menu. Wired Network Settings (page 470)
For the equipped network interface, the connection can be set by using Command Center RX. For the IB-50, the connection can be set on the dedicated Web page. Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE To switch to the network interface other than Wired (default), select the preferred setting on [Primary Network (Client)]. Others (page 488)
For other network settings, refer to the following: Network Settings (page 460)
TCP/IP (IPv4) setting
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] [Wired Network Settings] > "TCP/IP Settings" [IPv4 Settings]
78
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2 Configure the settings. · When using DHCP server · [DHCP]: On · When setting the static IP address · [DHCP]: Off · [Auto-IP]: Off · [IP Address]: Enter the address. · [Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255). · [Default Gateway]: Enter the address. · When using the Auto-IP Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · When setting the DNS server In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. · When using the host name with [DHCP] setting set to Off. · When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically. Select [Use DNS Server from DHCP] or [Use the following DNS Server]. If you selected [Use the following DNS Server], enter the [DNS Server (Primary)] and [DNS Server (Secondary)]. IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the machine OFF and then ON. Restart the network (page 486)
NOTE Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting.
79
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Configuring the Wireless Network
When the connection settings are configured through a Wi-Fi module-installed model, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment.
The configuration methods are as follows:
Configuration Method Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
Configuring Connections on the Web Page
Description
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-style screen, without setting individually in System menu. Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard (page 98) Use Wi-Fi Settings to configure the network details from System menu. Wi-Fi Settings (page 464)
This is a tool that can be downloaded from Download Center (https:// kyocera.info/). You can configure the connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard. Wired Connection with LAN Cable Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool (page 80)
The connection can be set using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
To switch to the network interface other than Wired (default), select the preferred setting on [Primary Network (Client)]. Others (page 488)
Wired Connection with LAN Cable Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or mobile device with the machine locally. To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
NOTE
Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS. Wi-Fi Settings (page 464)
1 Connect the machine with a computer.
1 Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2 Turn on the computer. IP addresses (link local addresses) of the machine and computer are generated automatically.
80
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
2 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
81
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 5 Utility tab > [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. NOTE
· Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] (Allow).
3 Configure the settings.
1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next] 2 [Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next] 3 [Easy setup] > [Next]
The machine is detected. NOTE
· Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search the machine.
· If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to search the machine.
4 Select the machine > [Next] 5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the administrator's login user
name and password. 6 Configure the communication settings > [Next]
82
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next] The network is configured.
83
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Wireless LAN Connection by Wi-Fi Direct Using Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or mobile device with the machine locally. To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to ON) and Restart Network from the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
NOTE Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS. Wi-Fi Settings (page 464)
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
2 Configure the settings. [Wi-Fi Direct]: On > [Close]
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings"[Restart Network] > [Restart]
4 Connect a computer or a mobile device with the machine. Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 87)
84
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
5 Launch the Wi-Fi Setup Tool.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar. 3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
85
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine 5 Utility tab > [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] The Wi-Fi Setup Tool will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. NOTE
· Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] (Allow).
6 Configure the settings.
1 [Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next] 2 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next] 3 [Advanced setup] > [Next]
Select [Express] or [Custom] as the device discovery method. You can specify an IP address or hostname as the discovery method. 4 Select the machine > [Next] 5 Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the administrator's login user name and password. 6 Configure the communication settings > [Next] 7 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next] The network is configured.
86
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
When the connection settings are configured, this enables you to print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows: · Configuring the connection from the operation panel on this machine · Configuring the connection by using push button
Connecting to Computers or Mobile Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
2 Configure the settings. "Wi-Fi Direct": On > [OK]
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network] > [Restart]
4 Specify the machine name from the computer or mobile device. If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes]. The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
87
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Connecting to Computers or Mobile Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct
Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS mobile devices.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
2 Configure the settings. "Wi-Fi Direct": On > [OK]
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network] > [Restart]
4 [Home] key > [DeviceInformation] > [Wi-Fi Direct/Wi-Fi] 5 Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password of "Wi-Fi Direct" 6 Configure the mobile device.
1 [Settings] > [Wi-Fi] 2 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list. 3 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]
The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
88
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button
When your computer or mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the network using push button.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
2 Configure the settings. "Wi-Fi Direct": On >[Close]
3 Restart the network. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network] > [Restart]
4 [Home] key > [DeviceInformation] > [Wi-Fi Direct/Wi-Fi] 5 Press the push button on the computer or mobile device and select "Wi-Fi Direct"
[Push Button Setup] > [OK] on the screen of operation panel.
The network between this machine and the computer or mobile device is configured.
IMPORTANT You can connect up to 10 mobile devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows: · Disconnect the network from the computer or mobile devices · Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select the [Home] key > [DeviceInformation] > [Wi-Fi Direct/Wi-Fi] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Device] > [Disconnect] > [Disconnect]. · Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 462) · Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX Command Center RX User Guide
89
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Energy Saver function
If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Sleep to minimize power consumption.
Sleep
To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] button, touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. For fax-compatible models, when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. In addition, the machine wakes up when the following operations are performed: · Select any key on the touch panel. · Touch the touch panel. Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows. 11.0 seconds or less Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
90
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time. The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows. · 1 minutes (default setting) To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following: Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard (page 98)
91
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Sleep Rules
You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot be recognized. For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following: Date/Time (page 405)
92
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe)
Sleep can be switched to two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The default setting is Energy Saver mode.
NOTE · Use the Energy Saver mode under normal circumstances. Use the Quick Recovery mode only when the
computer does not recognize USB-connected devices. Note that this will consume more power. For more information on Sleep Level, refer to the following: Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard (page 98)
93
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Energy Saver Recovery Level
This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode. For Energy Saver Recovery Level, [Full Recovery], [Normal Recovery] or [Power Saving Recovery] can be selected. The factory default is [Normal Recovery]. For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following: Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard (page 98) Energy Saver/Timer (page 406)
94
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Quiet Mode
Enables you to set the operating sound of the machine. When [Quiet Mode] is selected, its key light turns on.
95
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Power Off Timer (models for Europe)
If there is no external connection, the machine will automatically turn off when not used for a certain period of time. The Power Off Timer is used to set the time until the power turns off. The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 20 minutes Energy Saver/Timer (page 406)
96
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard
The following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.
Fax Setup
Configures basic fax settings. This item is displayed only for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Items Dialing/RX Mode Local Fax Information
Volume
Rings
Paper Source/Output Redial Show Power Off Message
Dialing Type Reception Mode
Local Fax Station Name Local Fax Station Number Local Fax ID TTI
Fax Speaker Volume Fax Monitor Volume Job Finish
Rings (Normal) Rings (TAD) Rings (Fax/Phone)
Paper Source Settings
Retry Times
Show Power Off Message
Contents
Paper setup
Configure the paper used for printing.
Items Cassette
Multipurpose Tray
Contents
Paper size (Cassette 1 to Cassette 2) Paper type (Cassette 1 to Cassette 2) Paper size Paper Type
Energy Saver Setup
Configures sleep mode.
Items Sleep Mode
Sleep Timer Sleep Rules Sleep Level
Contents
97
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Items Recovery Mode
Energy Saver Recovery Level
Contents
Network Setup
Configures network settings.
Items Network
Network Selection*1 Wi-Fi*2*3 DHCP*4 IP Address Subnet Mask*5 Default Gateway*5
Contents
*1 This function is displayed only on models equipped with Wi-Fi module. *2 This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi] is selected on network selection. *3 When Wi-Fi is selected, [Available Network] list is displayed. Select the access point to use, then select
[Connect] to configure. *4 This function is displayed when Network Selection is set to [Wired Network]. *5 This function is not displayed when DHCP is set to [On].
Email Setup
Set SMTP server name and sender address to enable mail sending.
Items
Contents
Email
SMTP (Email TX) SMTP Server Name*1 SMTP Port Number*1 Sender Address*1
*1 This function is displayed when SMTP (Email TX) is set to [On].
Security Setup
Specify the security level by Security Quick Setup.
Notification Setup
Set whether the panel notifies that the replacement time for consumables is approaching.
Configuring Settings Quick Setup Wizard
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
98
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]
2 Select a function. 3 Configure the settings.
Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings. NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following: Help Screen (page 72) [End]
Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied. [<< Previous]
Returns to the previous item. [Skip>>]
Advances to the next item without setting the current item. [Next>]
Advances to the next screen. [< Back]
Returns to the previous screen. [Finish]
Register the settings and exit the wizard.
99
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
To use printer function, TWAIN/WIA connection, or network fax function, download and install the required software from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/).
Published Software (Windows)
Software KX DRIVER
KPDL mini-driver/PCL minidriver FAX Driver TWAIN Driver WIA Driver
KYOCERA Net Viewer Status Monitor 5 File Management Utility KYOCERA Net Direct Print FONTS Quick Network Setup Tool Wi-Fi Setup Tool Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB Kyocera Printer Setup Tool
Description
This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine. Use this driver to create PDF files.
This is a Microsoft Minidriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used with this driver.
This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software application as a fax via the machine.
This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN compliant software application.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.
This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network.
This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a specified network folder.
This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/Reader.
These are display fonts that enable the machine's builtin fonts to be used in a software application.
A tool to configure the network (wired LAN) settings of the machine.
A tool to configure the wireless network (wireless LAN) settings of the machine.
A tool for creating shared folders on your PC, setting the created shared folders as destination folders on this machine, and the like.
A tool for connecting your printer to a wireless network, and installing recommended drivers and utilities.
Recommended software
100
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Software Kyocera Cloud Access
Description
A tool for enabling the use of cloud services from the operation panel of this machine.
Recommended software
NOTE · Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
101
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Windows
Downloading and installing from the website
Download and install a software from our website.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
102
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
5 Driver tab or Utility tab > of the software you want to download. An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.
2 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch. Follow the guidance on the screen to install the software. NOTE · Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] (Allow). 103
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Using the web installer
Install a software by using a web installer downloaded from our website.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the browser's address bar or location bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
104
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
5 Utility tab > of "Web installer". A web installer will be downloaded.
2 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
NOTE · Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] (Allow).
105
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3 Display the screen.
1 Read the license agreement. 2 Click [Accept] if there is no problem.
4 Click [Install].
106
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5 Select a model and click [Next].
NOTE · The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify
that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable. · If a desired device is not displayed, select [Add custom device] to directly select the device you want
to use.
107
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
6 Install the software.
1 Select software you want to install.
NOTE Software recommended to install have
in their checkboxes by default. Change as required.
2 Click [Install]. NOTE
If the Windows security screen appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
108
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
7 Finish the installation.
Click [Next] > [Finish] to finish the installation wizard. If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the printer driver installation procedure. If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following: Setting TWAIN Driver (page 117)
109
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Uninstalling Windows Software
Use a web installer to uninstall software. The web installer can be downloaded from the Download Center (https://kyocera.info/).
NOTE For details on how to download the web installer, refer to the following: Using the web installer (page 104)
1 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
NOTE Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
2 Display the screen.
1 Read the license agreement. 2 Click [Accept] if there is no problem.
3 Click [Uninstall].
110
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4 Uninstall the software.
1 Select software you want to uninstall.
2 Click [Uninstall].
5 Finish uninstalling. Click [Finish]. Restart the system for the uninstall to take effect.
111
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software on a Mac OS Computer
A printer driver can be installed for a Macintosh computer. NOTE
· Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges. · When installing for a Mac, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)].
Printer (page 448) · If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
Bonjour (page 482) · In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system. · When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" into the address bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
112
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
5 Driver tab > "Mac Printer Driver (x.x and later)" An installer of the selected software will be downloaded.
2 Install the Printer Driver. Double click to launch the downloaded installer. 113
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software. This completes the printer driver installation. If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected. If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.
114
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3 Configure the printer.
1 Open System Preferences and add the printer.
2 Select [Default] and click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver in Use.
The selected machine is added.
115
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software NOTE
When using an IP connection, click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the host name or IP address. The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in "Name". Change as required. 3 Select the options equipped with the machine.
116
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Click search box in the taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. TWAIN Driver Settings screen is displayed.
2 Click [Add].
2 Configure TWAIN Driver.
1 Enter the machine name. 2 Select this machine from the list. 3 Enter the machine's IP addresses or host name. 4 Set units of measurement. 5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
117
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 6 Click [OK]. NOTE When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
3 Finish registering.
NOTE Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
118
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver
Register this machine to the WIA Driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Click search box in taskbar, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen is displayed.
NOTE For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press [Properties].
2 Configure WIA Driver.
1 Click the [Settings] tab.
2 Enter the machine's IP addresses or host name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
4 Set units of measurement.
119
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software 5 Click [OK].
120
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter
Checking the Counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1 Display the screen. [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Counter]
2 Check the counter
121
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Administrator Privileges Overview
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator privileges, and another with Administrator privileges. The user with Machine Administrator privileges and the user with Administrator privileges can configure important settings for the machine. The differences in the privileges are as follows: User with Machine Administrator privileges
This user can configure the product's network settings, security settings such as user registration, and the machine's security level. Device Security Settings (page 492) User with Administrator privileges This user can configure the product's network settings, and security settings such as user registration. This user cannot set the machine's security level.
122
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator
The user with Machine Administrator privileges or the user with Administrator privileges must log in to configure important settings for the product, such as network settings and security settings. The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Machine Administrator
User Name Login User Name Login Password
DeviceAdmin 2600 2600
Administrator
User Name Login User Name Login Password
Admin Admin xxxxxxxxxx (Serial Number) Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 2)
IMPORTANT
To ensure security, be sure to change the factory default user name, login user name, and login password. Also, change your password regularly. Changing User Properties (page 528)
123
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Strengthening the Security
This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login user name and password. In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this machine to only those who have a registered login name and password. For details, refer to the following: User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 519)
NOTE
This product has an optional security chip called TPM (UG-51) (Trusted Platform Module). The encryption key used to encrypt confidential information on this machine is stored in a dedicated storage area on the TPM chip. Since this storage area cannot be read from outside the TPM, confidential information can be safely protected.
Restrict the users of the machine
· User Login Overview of User Login Administration (page 520)
· Authentication Security Authentication Security (page 523)
· Auto Panel Reset Auto Panel Reset (page 406)
· ID Card Settings The optional IC Card Authentication Kit is required. ID Card Settings (page 550)
Restrict the basic functions that can be used
· Local Authorization Local Authorization (page 536)
· Group Authorization Set Group Authorization Settings (page 539)
· Guest Authorization Set Guest Authorization Settings (page 542)
Output the document stored in the machine at the time when user operates the device via operation panel
· Remote Printing Printer (page 448)
Prevent the data stored in the machine from being leaked
· PDF Encryption Functions PDF Encryption Functions (page 360)
124
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator
Completely delete the data on the machine before disposing of the machine
· Data Sanitization Security Settings (page 489)
Protect the transmission from interception and wiretapping
· IPP over TLS [IPP over TLS] (page 477)
· HTTPS [HTTPS] (page 477)
· LDAP Security Command Center RX User Guide
· SMTP (Email TX) Email (page 439)
· FTP Encrypted TX FTP Encrypted TX (page 369)
· POP3 (Email TX) [POP3 (Email RX)] (page 475)
· Enhanced WSD over TLS TWAIN/WIA (page 459)
· IPSec IPSec (page 485)
· SNMPv3 [SNMPv3] (page 478)
Verify the software in the machine
· Software Verification Security Settings (page 489)
Preventing from execution of the unauthorized programs
· Allowlisting Security Settings (page 489)
125
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX. This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name. Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, you must enter the user name and password and log in. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu.
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
Setting Device Information/ Remote Operation Job Status
Document Box
Address Book
Device Settings Function Settings Network Settings Security Settings Management Settings
Description The machine's structure can be checked.
Administrator General User
Yes
Yes
Displays all device information, including print
Yes
Yes
and scan jobs, storing jobs, scheduled jobs, and
job log history.
Add or delete document boxes, or delete
Yes
Yes
documents within a document box.
The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the privilege of the user.
Create, edit, or delete addresses and address
Yes
Yes
groups.
The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the privilege of the user.
Configure the advanced settings of the machine. Yes
No
Configure the advanced function settings.
Yes
No
Configure the network advanced settings.
Yes
No
Configure the security advanced settings.
Yes
No
Configure the advanced management settings. Yes
No
NOTE
The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. FAX Operation Guide
126
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Accessing Command Center RX
1 Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] Example: https://10.180.81.1 (in the case of /IP address) https://MFP001 (if the host name is MFP001)
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status.
NOTE If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed, configure the certificate. Command Center RX User Guide You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
2 Configure the settings. Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. NOTE To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, you must enter the user name and password and log in. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu.
127
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Changing Security Settings
1 Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 Click [Security Settings].
2 Configure the settings. From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
NOTE For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
128
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Changing Device Information
1 Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 Click [System] from the [Device Settings] menu.
2 Specify the host name. Enter the device information, and then click [Submit]. IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON. To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart". 129
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
SMTP and E-mail Settings
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol. In addition, configure the following. SMTP settings
"SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP" The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
"Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings" The setting to limit the size of E-mails
"E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings" The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
130
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
1 Display the screen. Display the SMTP Protocol screen. 1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 Click [Protocol] from the [Network Settings] menu.
2 Configure the settings. Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocol".
131
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
3 Display the screen. Display the E-mail Settings screen. Click [E-mail] from the [Function Settings] menu.
4 Configure the settings. Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items. SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine. [SMTP Protocol] Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that [SMTP Protocol] is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocols] and set the SMTP protocol to [On]. 132
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
[SMTP Server Name] Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server. Be sure to enter the items.
[SMTP Port Number] Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25.
[SMTP Server Timeout] Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
[Authentication Protocol] To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for authentication.
[SMTP Security] Set [SMTP Security] of "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the "Protocol" page.
[Connection Test] Tests to confirm the proper operation under the settings without sending an email.
[Domain Restrictions] To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.
POP3 You don't need to set the items when you only use the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set the items if you want to enable the function of receiving e-mail on the machine. Command Center RX User Guide
E-mail Send Settings [E-mail Size Limit] Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-mail sending is canceled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit. [Sender Address] Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256 characters. Be sure to enter the items. [Signature] Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. [SMTP Authentication and Sender Address] Select either [Use Device Setting] or [Use Login User Information]. [Function Default] Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Defaults] page.
5 Click [Submit].
133
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Registering Destinations
1 Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] 3 Log in with administrator privileges.
4 In the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
5 Click [Add].
2 Populate the fields.
1 Enter the destination information. Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when registering via operation panel. Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 177)
2 Click [Submit].
134
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Transferring Data from Our Other Products
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced. This section explains how to transfer data between our products.
Migrating the Address Book
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). For details on KYOCERA Net Viewer operation, refer to the following: KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing up Address Book Data to PC
1 Start up KYOCERA Net Viewer.
135
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
2 Create a backup.
1 Right-click on the name of the model from which you want to back up the Address Book, and select [Advanced] > [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
136
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 3 Select destination device group and click [Next]. 4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
137
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 5 Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target device], and then click [Next].
6 Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the administrator's login user name and password, and then click [OK].
138
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 7 Click on [Save to file].
8 Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save]. For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
9 After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
139
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1 Start up KYOCERA Net Viewer. 2 Load the Address Book data.
1 Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select [Advanced] [Set multiple devices].
2 Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
140
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 3 Select destination device group and click [Next]. 4 Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
141
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 5 Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target device], and then click [Next].
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's Address Book from entry No.1. 6 Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
142
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products 7 Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts. 8 Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
143
Preparation before Use
3 Preparation before Use
Load Paper ...............................................................................................................................145 Paper Stopper ..........................................................................................................................158 Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .....................................159 Registering Destinations in the Address Book ....................................................................177
144
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Load Paper
Loading Paper
Load paper in the cassettes and multipurpose tray. For the paper load methods for each cassette, refer to the page below.
No. 1 2
Name Cassette 1 Cassette 2
Paper Size
A4, B5, A5-R, A6, B6, Legal, Oficio II,
Letter, Executive, Statement-R, Folio, 16K, 216mmx340m m,
B5(ISO), Custom
Paper Type
Capacity
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Rough, Letterhead, Color,
Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Page
Loading in the Cassettes (page 149)
145
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
No. 3
Name
Multipurpose Tray
Paper Size
A4, A5, A5-R, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, 216 × 340 mm, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, Statement/ Statement-R, Folio, ISO B5, Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Paper Type
Capacity
Plain, Transparency (OHP Film), Rough, Vellum, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, Labels, Envelope, Hagaki (Cardstock), Coated, Custom 1 to 8
50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Page
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 154)
NOTE
· The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type (thickness). · Do not use inkjet printer paper or paper with special coatings. (Doing so may lead to failures such as
paper jams.) · Use paper made for color printing if you want higher-quality color prints.
146
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Precaution for Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface. In addition, note the following points. · If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam. · Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of
problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. · If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag. IMPORTANT If you print onto used paper, make sure that it is not stapled or clipped. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to the following: About Paper (page 809)
147
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Paper Specifications available in the Cassettes
The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. The number of sheets that can be loaded in each cassette is shown below.
Cassette
Cassette 1 Cassette 2
250 sheets (Plain paper: 80 g/m2) 250 sheets (Plain paper: 80 g/m2)
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following: Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 810) For the paper type setting, refer to the following: [Media Type Setting] (page 417)
Capacity
IMPORTANT
· The Cassettes 1 to 2 can hold paper with weight between 60 to 220 g/m2 . · If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using.
148
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Loading in the Cassettes
1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
149
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
2 Adjust the paper length guides to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. (Cassette 1 only)
NOTE It is necessary to set the paper size from the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
150
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
151
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
4 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE When Folio, Oficio II or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
5 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
6 Configure the function Select the paper size and paper type. [Cassette 1 Settings] to [Cassette 2 Settings] (page 413) [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
152
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Paper Specifications available in the Multipurpose Tray
Up to 100 sheets of normal paper (64 g/m 2) can be added to the multipurpose tray. For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following: Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 810) For the paper type setting, refer to the following: [Media Type Setting] (page 417) Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT · If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the
paper you are using. The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows. · Plain paper (64 g/m 2), recycled paper, and colored paper: 100 sheets · Thick paper (209 g/m 2): 15 sheets · Thick paper (157 g/m 2): 30 sheets · Thick paper (104.7 g/m 2): 50 sheets · Hagaki (Cardstock): 30 sheets · Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei
2: 5 sheets · Coated: 30 sheets
NOTE · When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
[MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
153
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
154
Preparation before Use > Load Paper · If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
155
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type
The default paper size setting for cassette 1, for the multipurpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassette 2) is "A4" or "Letter", and the default media type setting is "Plain". To change the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Paper Feeding] > Select cassette
2 Select the paper size and paper type.
Cassette Paper Size and Media Type
Set the size of paper and Media type used in cassettes.
Item [Paper Size]
Description
Select the paper size.
Value (Cassette 1, 2) [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Custom]
[Media Type]
Value (Cassette 1, 2)
[Plain], [Rough], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
· To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following
[Media Type Setting] (page 417)
· When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.
· To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Paper Feed Settings (page 419)
156
Preparation before Use > Load Paper
Multipurpose Tray Paper Size and Media Type
Set the size of paper and media type used in the multipurpose tray.
Item [Paper Size]
Description
Select the paper size.
Value: [A4], [A5], [A5-R], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Statement-R], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Envelope #10], [Envelope #9], [Envelope #6], [Envelope Monarch], [Envelope DL], [Envelope C5], [Hagaki], [Oufukuhagaki], [Youkei 4], [Youkei 2], [Younaga 3], [Nagagata 3], [Nagagata 4], [Custom]
For custom paper size, set the size for each cassette.
[Custom Paper Settings] (page 415)
[Media Type]
Select the media type.
Value: [Plain], [Transparency], [Rough], [Labels], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Hagaki], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Envelope], [Thick], [Coated], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following.
[Media Type Setting] (page 417)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Paper Feed Settings (page 419)
NOTE
The available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. [Plain], [Labels], [Bond], [Recycled], [Color], [Envelope], [Hagaki], [Coated], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
157
Preparation before Use > Paper Stopper
Paper Stopper
When using paper A4/Letter or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.
158
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer. Screens of Windows 10 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows.
NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1 Display the screen. Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System Tool] [Control Panel] [System and Security] [System].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [Advanced system settings].
[All apps]
[Settings]
[System]
[About]
2 Check the computer name.
Check the computer name and full computer name. Screen example:
Computer name: PC001 Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the "System" screen.
159
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1 Display the screen. Click the [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System] [Command Prompt].
NOTE For Windows 11, select the [Start] button
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Command Prompts].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2 Check the domain name and user name. At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name. Screen example:
User Name: PC0270 Domain Name: PC0270
160
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer. NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group. 1 In Windows 10, open up a window in File Explorer and select [View], [Options], and then [Folder
Options]. In Windows 11, open up a window in File Explorer and select [...], , and then [Options].
2 Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings". 3 Click [OK].
1 Create a folder. Create a folder on your computer. For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
161
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Configure permission settings.
1 Right-click the "scannerdata" folder, select [Property] , and click [Sharing] tab, and [Advanced Sharing].
2 Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
3 Make a note of the Share name.
162
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 4 Click the [Add] button.
5 Specify the location.
1 If the computer name that you made a note is the same as the domain name: If the computer name is not shown in the "From this location" , click the [Locations] button, select the computer name, and click the [OK] button. Example: PC001 If the computer name that you made a note is not the same as the domain name: If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that you made a note of does not appear in the "From this location" , click the [Locations] button, select the text after the dot (.), and click the [OK] button. Example: abcdnet.com Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name (page 159)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the text box, and click the [OK] button. Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced] button and selecting a user.
163
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 6 Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 Select the user you entered. 2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of "Change" and "Read" 3 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the [Allow] checkmark of "Read". 7 Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
164
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 8 Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
1 Select the [Security] tab. 2 Select the user you entered.
If the user does not appear on "Group or user names", click [Edit] button to add user in a similar way of "configuration of permission settings". 3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and "Read & execute". 4 Click the [Close] button.
165
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Configuring Windows Firewall
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
1 Check file and printer sharing.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [System and Security] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
NOTE
· For Windows 11, select the Windows [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] Panel] [System and Security] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
· If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
[Control
2 Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
166
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Add a port.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] [System and Security] [Check firewall status].
2 Select [Advanced settings].
3 Select [Inbound Rules].
4 Select [New Rules].
167
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 5 Select [Port].
6 Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter "445" then click [Next].
168
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 7 Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button. 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
169
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 9 Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
170
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB
An environment for sending a document to Windows can be set up smoothly by using the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/). By operating the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB, you can configure the following settings. · Create a shared folder in a PC for receiving documents:
A new folder can be easily created on the desktop. Also, the newly created folder is automatically set as a shared folder. · Set the created shared folder as an address on this machine: Information about such things as the name of the computer and shared names for the shared folder is easily recorded in the address book of this machine with a sequence of actions. Can also be registered on the One Touch Keys. NOTE · Log on to Windows with administrator privileges. · If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution
authority.
1 Download a software from the website.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 Enter "https://kyocera.info/" to the browser's address bar or location bar.
3 Enter and search the product name, and select this product from the candidate list.
171
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 4 Change the selected operating system and its language setting as needed.
5 "Utility" tab > of "Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB" The Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB will be downloaded.
6 Double-click the downloaded installer to launch.
172
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select the device to use and click [Next].
NOTE · The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine,
verify that it is connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is turned on and click [Refresh].
· If user administration is valid on this machine, the user authentication screen appears. Log in with administrator privileges or as a user with execution authority.
The address book of the device appears.
173
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 2 Select [Add].
NOTE · Clicking on [Edit] after selecting the registered address allows you to change the content of the
registration. · Unchecking the [Show fax-capable addresses] check-box will hide the address containing the fax. 3 Create a new folder.
Select "Create a new folder on the desktop" and click [OK] to create a new folder on the desktop. (The default folder name is "Scan".)
NOTE · Click [Edit] to change the desktop folder name. · Selecting [Select an existing folder and address] allows you to select an existing folder that is
already set as a shared folder on the PC.
174
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 4 Enter the information requested to register the address.
1 Enter the name for display in the address book. 2 Display the folder name and path to the shared folder. 3 Shared folders can be selected from a PC on the network. 4 Display the user name of the selected PC. 5 Enter the password corresponds to the log in user name of the selected PC. 5 Click [OK] to register the address to the address book. 6 Click [Close]. 7 To register the registered address in a One Touch key, click [Yes].
175
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC 8 Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination, and click [Submit].
9 Click [Close]. 10 Click [Finish] to exit the Scan to Folder Setup Tool for SMB.
176
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax function installed).
NOTE · Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.
Registering Destinations (page 134) · Editing of the Address Book and One Touch Keys can be restricted to administrators.
One-Touch Key (page 445)
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges. One-Touch Key (page 445) Command Center RX User Guide
Registering an Address (E-mail Address)
The registering method of an E-mail address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] > [Menu] > [Add] > [Contact]
177
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
2 Add the name.
1 Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
2 Enter an address number. To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto] (000).
NOTE · Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups. · If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you
select [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (000) as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Add the address.
1 Select . 2 Select the entry field, and enter the E-mail address.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
4 Check if the destination entry is correct > [Register] The destination is added to the Address Book. To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information.
NOTE Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189)
178
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering an Address (Folder (SMB) Address)
The registering method of a folder (SMB) address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] > [Menu] > [Add] > [Contact]
2 Add the name.
1 Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
2 Enter an address number. To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto] (000).
NOTE · Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups. · If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you
select [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (000) as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Add the address.
1 Select . 2 To directly specify the SMB folder, enter "Host Name", "Port", "Folder Path", "Login User Name" and
"Login Password".
NOTE For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders, refer to the following: Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 159)
You can search for a folder on a PC on the network. Select [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]. Select the folder from the Search Results list.
179
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
NOTE · If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination. · If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and "Host
Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination. · A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want
to specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. · After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
The table below explains the items to be entered. "Host Name"
Computer name. Specify "Host name" or "IP address". To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]) "Port" Port number If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445. "Folder Path" Share name. For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder "Login User Name" · If the computer name and domain name are the same
User Name For example: james.smith. · If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith If the computer name and domain name are different because "\" is not available, use @ to enter the user name in the following format: User name@Domain name (Example: james.smith@abcdnet) "Login Password" Windows logon password (Case sensitive)
180
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book NOTE
· For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
· Select [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
4 Check if the destination entry is correct > [Register] The destination is added to the Address Book. To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information. NOTE Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189)
181
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering an Address (Folder (FTP) Address)
The registering method of a folder (FTP) address to Address Book is as follows.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] > [Menu] > [Add] > [Contact]
2 Add the name.
1 Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
2 Enter an address number. To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto] (000).
NOTE · Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups. · If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you
select [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (000) as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
3 Add the address.
1 Select .
2 Enter "Host Name", "Port", "Folder Path", "Login User Name" and "Login Password". The table below explains the items to be entered. "Host Name" Host name or IP address of FTP server To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ]. (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]) "Port" Port number If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 21. "Folder Path" Path for the file to be stored. For example: User\ScanData If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory. When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
182
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book "Login User Name" FTP server login user name "Login Password" FTP server login password NOTE · For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805) · Select [Connection Test] or [Connection Test (Encrypted TX)] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
4 Check if the destination entry is correct > [Register] The destination is added to the Address Book. To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information. NOTE Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189)
183
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Add the group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed before proceeding. Up to 100 destinations for the E-mail, FAX, and a total of 5 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per group.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] > [Menu] > [Add] > [Group]
2 Add the name.
1 Enter an address number. To have the number assigned automatically, select [Auto] (000).
NOTE · Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 200
numbers for contacts and 50 numbers for groups. · If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you
select [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set [Auto] (000) as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
2 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
3 Select the destinations.
1 Select destinations (contacts), then [OK] to add to the group. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select an item and remove the checkmark to cancel the selection.
NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Choosing from the Address Book (page 284)
184
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
4 Check if the group entry is correct > [Register] The group is added to the Address Book. To add a new address to the One Touch Key, select [Register] and follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information. NOTE Refer to the following for registering the One Touch Key. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189)
185
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing Contact Address in Address Book
Edit the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
2 Edit a contact address.
1 Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address. Registering an Address (E-mail Address) (page 177) Registering an Address (Folder (SMB) Address) (page 179) Registering an Address (Folder (FTP) Address) (page 182)
2 [Save] > [OK] Register the changed destination.
186
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Editing Group Address in Address Book
Edit the destinations (group address) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
2 Edit a destination to a group.
1 Change "Name" and "Address Number". Add the group (page 184)
2 Change the destination. Put a checkmark in the checkbox to select an item and remove the checkmark to cancel the selection.
3 [Save] > [OK] Register the changed destination.
187
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting Address Book Entries
Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] NOTE
Destinations and group can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Choosing from the Address Book (page 284)
2 [Menu] > [Delete] > [Delete] Delete the contact or group.
188
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to a one touch key. NOTE
· Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key. Choosing from One Touch Key (page 286)
· You can add One Touch Keys and edit their settings on Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
· If registering and editing of the One Touch Keys is restricted to administrators, you can edit the One Touch Keys by logging in with administrator privileges. One-Touch Key (page 445) Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit One-Touch Key]
2 Add One Touch Keys.
1 Select a One Touch Key number for the destination > [Menu] > [Add/Edit] Enter a number in [Search (No.)] and select (search icon) to display that One Touch Key. Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
2 Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen. NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
189
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
3 Select [Destination]. The Address Book appears.
4 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [OK] Selecting (information icon) shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Choosing from the Address Book (page 284)
5 Select [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
Editing the Destination to the One Touch Key
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit One-Touch Key] Enter a number in [Search (No.)] and select (search icon) to display that One Touch Key.
NOTE Select (information icon) for the One Touch Key to display the information registered in the One Touch Key.
2 Change the Registered Information.
1 Change "Display Name".
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
2 Select [Destination], and select a new destination (contact or group). shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
Selecting (information icon)
NOTE Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Choosing from the Address Book (page 284)
3 [OK] > [OK] The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
190
Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit One-Touch Key] Enter a number in [Search (No.)] and select (search icon) to display that One Touch Key.
2 Delete the Registered Information. [Menu] > [Delete] > [Delete] The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.
191
Print from PC
4 Print from PC
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ......................................................................................193 Printing from PC ......................................................................................................................197 Printing from the Mobile Device............................................................................................208 Printing Data Saved in the Printer.........................................................................................211 Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)...................................................................226
192
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings. Printer Driver User Guide
1 [Quick Print] tab Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
2 [Basic] tab This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size, destination, and duplex printing.
3 [Layout] tab This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode, poster printing, and scaling.
4 [Imaging] tab This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
5 [Publishing] tab This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
6 [Job] tab This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.
7 [Advanced] tab This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
8 [Profiles] Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
193
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen 9 [Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display Help as explained below.
1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the screen.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
NOTE The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.
194
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 10)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when printing. For the settings, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
1 Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Windows System] [Control Panel] and [Devices and Printers].
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preference...] button on the [General] tab. 4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
195
Print from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 11)
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when printing. For the settings, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
1 Click the [Start] button [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers] 2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties]
menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preference...] button on the [General] tab. 4 Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
196
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER. NOTE
· To print the document from applications, install the printer driver downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/) on your computer.
· In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
· When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 154)
Printing on Standard Size Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
NOTE Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel. Paper Feeding (page 413)
1 Display the screen. Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
197
Print from PC > Printing from PC
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Select the [Basic] tab. 3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered. Printing on Non-standard Size Paper (page 199) To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select the media type.
4 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
198
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing on Non-standard Size Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the print settings screen of the printer driver. The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.
NOTE Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel. Paper Feeding (page 413)
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System Tool] [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [Devices and Printers].
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Control Panel]
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab.
199
Print from PC > Printing from PC
2 Register the group.
1 Click the [Basic] tab.
2 Click the [Page Sizes] button. 3 Click the [New] button.
4 Enter the paper size. 5 Enter the name of the paper. 6 Click the [Save] button. 7 Click the [OK] button.
200
Print from PC > Printing from PC 8 Click the [OK] button.
3 Display the print settings screen. Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
4 Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.
1 Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Select the [Basic] tab.
201
Print from PC > Printing from PC 3 Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click [Media type] menu and select the media type.
NOTE If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media type" menu. 4 Select the paper source in the "Source" menu. 5 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
202
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Printing with Universal Print
Jobs can be printed via the cloud by using the cloud service "Universal Print" provided by Microsoft Corporation. Users authorized in the Azure Active Directory can print to Universal Print ready printers from anywhere.
NOTE · A Microsoft 365 license and an Azure Active Directory account are necessary in order to use Universal
Print. If you do not have one, please obtain these licenses and accounts. · In order to use Universal Print, the following prerequisites need to be met:
· A Universal Print-eligible license must be assigned to the user account used · Printer Administrator or Global Administrator privileges must be assigned to all administrators
Registering the Machine to Universal Print
1 Start up the browser. Specify https://[Host name of this Machine] and start Command Center RX.
2 Display the screen. [Function Settings] > [Printer] > "Universal Print Settings" > [Settings]
3 Configure the settings.
1 Enter "Printer Name" in "Basic".
NOTE Set the proxy if required. Command Center RX User Guide
2 Click [Register] in "Universal Print". A Microsoft URL and an access code are displayed.
3 Click the URL and enter the access code obtained in Step 2 > [Next] 4 Log in as Azure administrator.
NOTE Credential is required only when you register for the first time. Click [Approve].
5 Close the Microsoft web page and return to the Command Center RX screen.
203
Print from PC > Printing from PC 6 Click [OK]. Returns to the Universal Print Settings screen. NOTE Once registration is complete, [Register] in "Universal Print" will change to [Unregister], and the expiration date of certificate will be shown. Click [Refresh] if the display remains unchanged. 7 Click [Edit] in "Universal Print Preferences" and copy the unregister URL. 8 Open a new tab in the browser and paste the URL. You will be redirected to the Universal Print web page. 9 Click [Printers]. Registered printers are displayed. 10 Check the box for this machine and click [Share]. The "Shares printers" screen is displayed. 11 Select the users you want to share this machine with from the "Select member(s)" menu and click the [Share Printer] button. NOTE Enable [Allow access to everyone in my organization] to share this machine with all users in your organization. 12 Close the Universal Print web page.
204
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Registering a Shared Printer to a Computer
To use Universal Print, it is necessary to add a shared printer registered with Universal Print to the computer.
1 Login
1 Select the Windows Start button [Settings] [Accounts] [Access work or school]. 2 Confirm that the Azure administrator account name is displayed in [Work or school account], and click
it. NOTE
If the Azure administrator account name is not displayed, click [+] (Connect), and use the Azure administrator account name and password to log in.
2 Display the screen. Select [Home] [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
3 Configure the function.
1 Click [Add a printer or scanner]. 2 Select the shared printer and click [Add device].
The shared printer is registered.
205
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Print the Job
1 Display the screen. Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select a registered shared printer from the [Printer] menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Set the paper size, printer function, etc., as desired. 3 Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
206
Print from PC > Printing from PC
Canceling Printing from a Computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following: NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following: Canceling Jobs (page 257)
1 Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2 Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the "Document" menu.
207
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing from the Mobile Device
This machine supports the AirPrint and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any mobile device or computer without installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later products. To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
208
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance. For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
209
Print from PC > Printing from the Mobile Device
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly on a peer-to-peer basis. The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal mobile devices. When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection. When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.
210
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Data Saved in the Printer
You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary. If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box (memory) and printing can be executed at the machine. To print the job in Job Box, specify the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job, then specify a file within a Box and printing it, using the operation panel. You can print the documents from the following boxes. · Private Print Box
Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 212) · Stored Job Box
Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 214) · Quick Copy Box
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 216) · Proof and Hold Box
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 218) · PIN Print Box
Printing Documents from PIN Print Box (page 220) · Universal Print Box
Printing the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box (page 223)
Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job
1 Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print dialog box displays.
2 Click the [ ] button of the Name to select the machine from the list. 3 Click the [Properties] button.
The Properties dialog box displays.
4 Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check box to set the function.
NOTE For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
211
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from Private Print Box
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job from the application software, specify a password in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by entering the password on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Enter the password. 3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired. 4 Select [Start Print]. Printing starts. Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
212
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete > [Menu] > [Delete]
2 Enter the password. The document is deleted.
213
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Stored Job Box
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up a password as necessary. If you set up a password, enter the password when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Enter the password. 3 Specify the number of copies to print as desired. 4 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts.
NOTE If the document is protected by a password, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the password.
Simple Job Printing
When you save a print job performed via user login to the Stored Job Box, logging in with an IC card at the time of printing displays a list of your print jobs in the Stored Job Box. When you run the print job, printing starts immediately. User login administration that uses the optional IC Card Authentication Kit is required. For details on user login administration for printing, refer to the following: Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525) Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC (page 531) For IC card settings, refer to the following: ID Card Settings (page 550) For Simple Job Printing settings, refer to the following: Quick Job Printing (page 552)
214
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Private Print/Stored Job]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete > [Delete] 2 If the document is protected by a password, enter the password.
The document is deleted.
215
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE · When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one. · To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (page 452)
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired. 3 Select [Start Print]. Printing starts.
216
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document. Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete] The document is deleted.
217
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can change the number of copies to print.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Specify the number of copies to print as desired. 3 Select [Start Print]. Printing starts.
218
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document. Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Delete] The document is deleted.
219
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Documents from PIN Print Box
This PIN Print Box holds printing when printing is executed from applications that use the IPP protocol, such as AirPrint and Mopria. A pending print job can be output by entering the PIN code that was set at the time of printing.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [PIN Print]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Enter the PIN code. 3 Select [Print]. Printing starts.
220
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the PIN Print Box
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Job Box] 2 Select [PIN Print]. 3 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete > [Delete] 2 Enter the PIN code. 3 Select [Delete].
The document is deleted.
221
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing Document from Universal Print Box
For added security, Universal Print can set a PIN code for the printing jobs. Jobs with a PIN code will be saved in the cloud without being printed. By entering the PIN code from the operation panel, jobs from this machine can be printed.
NOTE · To use Universal Print, this machine must be registered as a shared printer.
Registering the Machine to Universal Print (page 203) · To use the Universal Print box, you need a Windows 11 and Microsoft 365 license and an Azure Active
Directory account.
Storing a Job in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen. Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select a registered shared printer from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2 Select [Advanced settings]. 3 Set [PIN-protected printing] to [On], and set a PIN code (4 digits) as the [PIN-protected printing PIN]. 4 Click [OK] button > [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3 Start printing. Click the [OK] button.
222
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Printing the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen.
1 Select [Universal Print] in the Home screen. 2 Select the creator of the document.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the document to print > [Print] 2 Enter the PIN code. 3 Select [Start Print].
Printing starts. Upon completion of printing, the Universal Print data is automatically deleted.
223
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Universal Print Box
1 Display the screen.
1 Select [Universal Print] in the Home screen. 2 Select the creator of the document.
2 Delete the document.
1 Select the document to delete > [Delete] 2 Enter the PIN code. 3 Select [Delete].
224
Print from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer
Configure the Job Box
Configure settings for Job Box.
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings]
2 Configure the settings. The following settings can be configured. [Quick Copy Job Retention] To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Value: number between 0 and 300 NOTE When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used. [Deletion of Job Retention] This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time. Value: [Off], [1 hour], [4 hours], [1 day], [1 week] NOTE This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
225
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function. NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below. · KX DRIVER is installed. · Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD over TLS] is enabled.
Protocol Settings (page 475)
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
226
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor. Exit manually
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor. Exit automatically
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down if it is not being used.
227
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Quick View State
The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
1 Printing progress tab 2 Paper tray status tab 3 Toner Status Tab 4 Alert tab 5 Expand button 6 Settings icon Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
228
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Printing Progress Tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
1 Status icon 2 Job list Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
229
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Paper Tray Status Tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
230
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
231
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
232
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
[Command Center RX] If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB connection. Command Center RX User Guide
[Notification...] This sets the display of the Status Monitor. Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 234)
[www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com] Open our website.
[Exit] Exits the Status Monitor.
233
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Notification Settings
The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1 Select "Enable event notification". If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is executed.
2 Select an event to use with the text to speech function in Available events.
234
Print from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
3 Click "Sound file / Text to Speech" column. Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
NOTE The available file format is WAV. When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
235
Operation on the Machine
5 Operation on the Machine
Loading Originals ....................................................................................................................237 Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites).................................................................242 Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ....................................250 Copying ..................................................................................................................................... 256 Basic Scanning (Sending)........................................................................................................258 Sending Document via E-mail ................................................................................................259 Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................261 Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ...........................................265 Scanning using TWAIN or WIA...............................................................................................268 Useful Sending Method ..........................................................................................................270 WSD Scan..................................................................................................................................271 Scanning with FMU Connection.............................................................................................275 Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)................................................277 Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself).............................279 Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) .....................................................................280 Canceling Sending Jobs ..........................................................................................................282 Handling Destination ..............................................................................................................283 How to use the FAX Function .................................................................................................292 Using Document Boxes ..........................................................................................................293 Using Removable USB Drive ..................................................................................................297
236
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function. Platen
Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes. Document processor
Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two-sided originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flat against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Size (page 313)
237
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Placing Envelopes or Cardstock on the Platen
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flat against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following: Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 154) CAUTION Do not leave the Document Processor open. Doing so may cause injury. IMPORTANT · Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass. · When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open position.
238
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
Original Specifications available in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals.
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Setting Thickness Size No. of sheets
Description 60 to 90 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 160 g/m2) Maximum Folio (Legal) to Minimum A6 (Statement) Plain paper 80 g/m2: 50 sheets or less (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the document processor may become dirty. · Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.) · Originals with adhesive tape or glue · Originals with cut-out sections · Curled original · Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.) · Carbon paper · Crumpled paper
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
IMPORTANT
· Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
· Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
· Depending on the timing of using Document Processor, the loading speed may decrease.
· Attach the Original Stopper bandled in the box when scanning legal-sized original to avoid from falling original from tray. (The stopper may not bandle for some countries.)
239
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals
1 Adjust the original width guides.
2 Place the original.
1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.
NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Orientation (page 319)
IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
240
Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed on the right side (so that they will be scanned last).
241
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
After you add frequently used functions to Favorites, you can recall them quickly and easily. Favorites are registered by selecting from two types of recalling methods. · Wizard Mode (Selection Dialog): Recall the registered settings in order and configure while confirming or
modifying them. · Program Mode: When you select a key registered as a favorite, the setting is recalled immediately. The favorites below have been preregistered. The registered contents can be re-registered for easier use in your environment.
NOTE · Up to 20 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the favorites. · If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator
privileges.
ID Card Copy
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet. Default Registration
· Copy Functions · ID Card Copy · Color Selection: [Black & White] · Paper Selection: [Cassette 1] · Zoom: [100%]
Paper Saving Copying
Use when you want to save paper. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure page aggregation or 2-sided copying. Default Registration
· Copy Functions · Color Selection: [Black & White] · Combine: [2 in 1] · Duplex: [1-sided>>2-sided] · Paper Selection: Cassette 1 · Number of copies printed: 1
242
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Simple Sending Job Folder (Destination Entry)
Use when you want to send images to a shared folder on any computer or to a folder on the FTP server. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the settings, such as the destination or color selection. Default Registration
· Sending Function · Destination: New Folder · Color Selection: [Auto Color (Color/Grayscale)] · File Name Entry: Default value · File Format: [PDF] · Continuous Scan: On · Scan Resolution: [300x300dpi]
Simple Sending Job Folder (Address Book)
Use when you want to send images to a shared folder on a computer registered in the address book or to a folder on the FTP server. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the settings, such as the destination or color selection. Default Registration
· Sending Function · Destination: Address Book · Color Selection: [Auto Color (Color/Grayscale)] · File Name Entry: Default value · File Format: [PDF] · Continuous Scan: On · Scan Resolution: [300x300dpi]
Simple Sending Email (Destination Entry)
Use when you want to send images to any email address. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the settings, such as the destination or color selection. Default Registration
· Sending Function · Destination: New Email Address · Color Selection: [Auto Color (Color/Grayscale)] · File Name Entry: Default value · File Format: [PDF] · Continuous Scan: On · Scan Resolution: [300x300dpi] · Email Subject: Default Value · Email Body: Default Value
243
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Simple Sending Email (Address Book)
Use when you want to send images to an email address registered in the address book. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the settings, such as the destination or color selection. Default Registration
· Sending Function · Destination: Address Book · Color Selection: [Auto Color (Color/Grayscale)] · File Name Entry: Default value · File Format: [PDF] · Continuous Scan: On · Scan Resolution: [300x300dpi] · Email Subject: Default Value · Email Body: Default Value
Register Favorites (Wizard Mode)
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Copy] 2 Select [Menu] > [Favorites].
2 Register Favorites.
1 [Menu] > [Add] > Select a number (01 to 20) for the favorite number.
NOTE If you register on a favorite number already registered, delete the currently registered favorite before registering.
2 Select [Wizard]. 3 Select the function to recall > [Next >]. 4 Enter the new favorite name > [Register].
The favorite is registered. To display a registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Add] on the confirmation screen that appears. 5 Select [OK].
244
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Register Favorites (Program Mode)
When selecting the program format, first set the copy function, transmission function, fax function, destination, etc. to be registered.
1 Display the screen
1 Select [Copy] in the Home screen. 2 Select [Menu] > [Favorites] while the copy mode is accessed.
2 Register Favorites.
1 [Menu] > [Add] > Select a number (01 to 20) for the favorite number. NOTE
If you register on a favorite number already registered, delete the currently registered favorite before registering. 2 Select [Program]. 3 Enter the new favorite name > [Register]. The favorite is registered. To display a registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Add] on the confirmation screen that appears. 4 Select [OK].
245
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Recalling Favorites (Program Mode)
1 Recall the favorite.
1 Select [Favorites] of the task bar of the home screen or [Favorites] of the [Copy] functions screen, the [Send] functions screen, or the like, or select a registered favorites icon. If you selected the icon of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected [Favorites], proceed to the next step.
2 Select the number of the favorite you want to recall. Select [Search], enter the number of the favorite (01 to 20), and select [OK] to call up that favorite. NOTE If the favorite cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the favorite might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
2 Execute the favorite. Place the originals > [Start] key
246
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Recalling Favorites (Wizard Mode)
1 Recall the favorite.
1 Select [Favorites] of the task bar of the home screen or [Favorites] of the [Copy] functions screen, the [Send] functions screen, or the like, or select a registered favorites icon. If you selected the icon of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected [Favorites], proceed to the next step.
2 Select the favorite number you want to recall. Select [Search], enter the favorite number (01 to 20), and select [OK] to call up that favorite. NOTE If the favorite cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in the favorite might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
2 Execute the favorite.
1 The screens will be displayed in order, so make the settings then select [>]. After setting to the end, a confirmation screen will be displayed. NOTE If you need to change the settings, select [<] and change the settings.
2 Place the originals > [Start] key
247
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Editing Favorites
You can change favorite number and favorite name.
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Favorites] 2 Select [Menu] > [Edit].
2 Edit the favorite.
1 Select corresponding to the favorite number (01 to 20) to change. 2 Select [Menu] > [Edit] to change the favorite number and name.
Register Favorites (Wizard Mode) (page 244) 3 [OK] > [OK]
248
Operation on the Machine > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Deleting Favorites
1 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [...] > [Favorites] 2 Select [Menu] > [Edit].
2 Deleting Favorites.
1 Select the corresponding favorite number (01 to 20) to delete. 2 [Menu] > [Delete] > [Delete]
249
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary.
Creating new shortcuts
New shortcuts can be created in the basic screen of each function.
1 Display the basic screen you want to register. 2 Register the shortcuts.
1 Select [Menu] > [Shortcut]. The Add/Edit Shortcut screen is displayed.
250
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) 2 Select [Add].
3 Select the function you want to register > [Next >]. 4 Enter the shortcut name > [Next >].
NOTE The function name will be displayed if you do not enter a shortcut name. 5 Confirm the entry. Select [Shortcut Name], [Function], or [Permission] to change the settings.
NOTE [Permission] is displayed when the user login administration is enabled. 6 Select [Finish]. The shortcut is registered.
251
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Editing Shortcuts
Shortcut editing is performed in the basic screen of each function.
1 Display the basic screen you want to register. 2 Edit the shortcut.
1 Select [Menu] > [Shortcut]. The Add/Edit Shortcut screen is displayed.
252
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) 2 Select the shortcut you prefer to edit.
3 Select [Edit].
4 [Shortcut Name] or [Function] > Change the Settings > [OK] 5 [Finish] > [Update]
253
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Deleting Shortcuts
Shortcut deletion is performed in the basic screen of each function.
1 Display the basic screen you want to register. 2 Delete the shortcuts.
1 Select [Menu] > [Shortcut]. The Add/Edit Shortcut screen is displayed.
254
Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) 2 Select the shortcut you want to delete > [Menu] > [Delete] > [Delete].
255
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Basic Operation
1 [Home] key > [Copy] 2 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 Configure the functions. Scroll the window to display the functions, then configure the settings. About Functions Available on the Machine (page 304)
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Select the area for inputting the number of sheets to display the numeric keypad. Or, use [+] or [-] to enter the number of sheets. Specify the desired number up to 999.
5 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins. 256
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Canceling Jobs
1 Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed. 2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned, the copy job is canceled. When there is a job printing or on standby, canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted. Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
257
Operation on the Machine > Basic Scanning (Sending)
Basic Scanning (Sending)
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available. · Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Document via E-mail (page 259)
· Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 261)
· Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 265)
· Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program. Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 268) NOTE
· Different sending options can be specified in combination. Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 277)
· The fax function can be used for sending. The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. FAX Operation Guide
258
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Sending Document via E-mail
NOTE · When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Others (page 488) · Before sending the scanned document with an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings.
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
1 [Home] key > [Send] 2 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [Enter destination] > [Email] 4 Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]
259
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail
Up to 256 characters can be entered. Character Entry Method (page 805) When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 290) To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified. You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 288)
NOTE · If "Broadcast" is set to [Prohibit], multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Send/Store (page 437)
5 Configure the settings. Select the function, then configure the settings. Send (page 307)
IMPORTANT · [Email Encrypted TX] or [Digital Signature to Email] is displayed when S/MIME is configured from
Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide · When using [Email Encrypted TX] and [Digital Signature to Email], specify the Email addresses which have encryption certificate, from the address book. Cannot be set from the directly-entered address.
6 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
7 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen if more than one destination is specified. Confirm and select [Yes]. Sending starts.
260
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer. NOTE
· When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance. Others (page 488)
· Before sending the scanned document to the shared folder on your computer, you must configure the following settings: · Make a note of the computer name and full computer name Making a Note of the Computer Name and Full Computer Name (page 159) · Make a note of the user name and domain name Making a Note of the User Name and Domain Name (page 160) · Create a shared folder and make a note of the shared folder name Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 161) · Configure the Windows firewall Configuring Windows Firewall (page 166)
1 [Home] key > [Send] 2 Place the original
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [Enter destination] > [SMB]
261
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
4 Enter the destination information To directly specify the SMB folder, select [Folder Path Entry] and enter each item.
NOTE
When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 290)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Setting
Detail
Host Name Port Folder Path Login User Name
Login Password
Computer name. Enter "Host Name" or "IP Address". To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ]. Limited character count: 256 characters or less Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10] (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
Port number If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
Share name Limited character count: 260 characters or less For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder
· If the computer name and domain name are the same User Name For example: james.smith.
· If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Limited character count: 64 characters or less If the computer name and domain name are different because "\" is not available, use @ to enter the user name in the following format: User name@Domain name (Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
Login password. Limited character count: 128 characters or less Upper case and lowercase letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
You can search for a folder on a PC on the network. Select [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]. Select the folder from the Search Results list.
262
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
NOTE · If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination. · If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can search for a destination from among PCs that
are connected to the network by entering "Domain/Workgroup Name"/"Host Name". · A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. · After you enter the login user name and login password of the destination PC, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
5 Check the information.
1 Check the information. Change the settings as required.
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection. "Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot connect." appears, review the entry. To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].
NOTE · If "Broadcast" is set to [Prohibit], multiple destinations cannot be entered.
6 Select [OK]. Destinations can be changed later.
7 Configure the functions. Select the Global Navigation to display other functions.
8 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
263
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)
9 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen if more than one destination is specified. Confirm and select [Yes]. Sending starts.
264
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
NOTE · When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Others (page 488) · Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
Protocol Settings (page 475)
1 [Home] key > [Send] 2 Load paper.
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [Enter destination] > [FTP] 4 Enter the destination details.
Character Entry Method (page 805) NOTE
When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 290) The table below explains the items to be entered.
265
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
Setting Host Name
Port Folder Path
Login User Name Login Password
Detail
Host name or IP address of FTP server To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ]. Limited character count: 64 characters or less Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::1]
Port number If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 21.
Path for the file to be stored Limited character count: 128 characters or less For example: User\ScanData If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory. When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash "/" not using the back-slash.
FTP server login user name Limited character count: 64 characters or less
FTP server login password Limited character count: 64 characters or less Upper case and lower-case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
5 Check the information.
1 Check the information. Change the settings as required.
2 Select [Connection Test] to check the connection. "Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot connect." appears, review the entry. To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].
NOTE · If "Broadcast" is set to [Prohibit], multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Send/Store (page 437)
6 Select [OK]. Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 288)
7 Configure the functions. Select the Global Navigation to display other functions. Send (page 307)
266
Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)
8 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
9 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen if more than one destination is specified. Confirm and select [Yes]. Sending starts.
267
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.
NOTE · When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Others (page 488) · Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings
are configured. Setting TWAIN Driver (page 117) Setting WIA Driver (page 119)
1 Display the screen.
1 Activate the TWAIN compatible application software. 2 Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
NOTE For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
2 Configure the settings. Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
NOTE For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
3 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
268
Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA
4 Scan the originals. Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.
269
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method
You can specify the following useful scanning (sending) methods. WSD Scan
Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. Executing WSD scan (page 273) Scanning using File Management Utility Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves the image data and scanning information on a specified server or in a specified folder. Scanning with FMU Connection (page 275) Scanning using the fax server You can send a scanned document via a fax server. Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send) (page 280) Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation. Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending) (page 277) Send to Me (Email) Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled. Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself) (page 279)
270
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer. NOTE
· To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is networkconnected, and "Sending Job - WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings. WSD Scan (page 443)
· For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
· When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance. Others (page 488)
Install the Driver (for Windows 10)
1 Right-click the [Start] button in Windows and select [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers]
2 Install the driver. Click [Add Device]. Select the icon that displays the machine model name, and click [Next]. When the machine model icon is displayed as a "printer" on the "Devices and Printers" screen, installation is complete.
271
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
Install the Driver (for Windows 11)
1 Click the [Start] button [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers] 2 Install the driver.
Click [Add Device]. Select the icon that displays the machine model name, and click [Next]. When the machine model icon is displayed as a "printer" on the "Devices and Printers" screen, installation is complete.
272
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
Executing WSD scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE · When transmitting using wireless LAN, select the interface dedicated to the send function in advance.
Others (page 488) · To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine are network-
connected, and "WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings. WSD Scan (page 443) · For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.
1 [Home] key > [Send] 2 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 In the destination screen for sending, select [Enter destination] > [WSD Scan] 4 Scan the originals.
· For operations on this machine, refer to steps 5 to 8. · For operations on PC, refer to steps 9 and 10.
5 (Procedure using this machine) [From Operation Panel] > [Next >]
6 Select the destination computer > [OK] Select [Reload] to reload the computer list. You can view information on the selected computer by selecting
(information icon).
7 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
273
Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan
8 Press the [Start] key. Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
9 (Procedure from your computer) [From Computer] > [Start] 10 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.
274
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with FMU Connection
Scanning with FMU Connection
"FMU Connection" is installed on the machine as a standard application. FMU Connection can be used to scan an original according to the settings configured with "File Management Utility" (downloaded from Download Center (https://kyocera.info/)), and save the image data and scanning information on a specified server or folder. Unlike regular transmission functions, this application lets you use metadata such as the scan date and time and the data format.
1 Configure the settings. The first time you use FMU Connection, you must start it up in System Menu. Activating Applications To use FMU Connection, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure the multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. For installation of File Management Utility, refer to the following: Installing Software (page 100)
NOTE For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following: File Management Utility User Guide
2 Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is installed.
3 Place the original.
4 Select [FMU Connection]. FMU Connection will start up.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information and select [Next].
6 When the scan settings screen appears, select each item and configure the necessary settings. The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.
275
Operation on the Machine > Scanning with FMU Connection
7 Press the [Start] key. Sending starts.
276
Operation on the Machine > Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
You can specify destinations combining E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP), and fax numbers. This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items: Up to 50 However, number of items are restricted for the following sending options. · E-mail and fax: Up to 100 in total · Folders (SMB, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one time.
NOTE · If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white. · If [Broadcast] is set to [Prohibit], multiple destinations cannot be entered.
Send/Store (page 437)
Sending to different types of destinations
1 [Home] key > [Send] 2 Place the original. 3 Specify the recipient. 4 Configure the settings.
Select the Global Navigation to display other functions. Send (page 307)
277
Operation on the Machine > Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending)
5 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
6 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen. Confirm and select [Yes].
Sending starts.
278
Operation on the Machine > Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself)
Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself)
Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
1 Configure the settings. Before using this function, the following are necessary. · The function icon must be displayed in the home screen. Editing the Home Screen (page 64) · An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525)
2 Select the [Home] key 3 Select [Send to Me (Email)].
NOTE When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
279
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
You can send a scanned document via a fax server. NOTE
· A fax server is required to use this function. For information about the fax server, contact the applicable administrator.
· FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide Connectivity (page 487)
1 [Home] key > [Send] You can specify the destination by configuring the FAX settings with the icon displayed on the desktop.
2 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
3 Display the screen. In the destination screen for sending, select [+] > [Fax Server].
280
Operation on the Machine > Using a Fax Server to Send (Fax Server Send)
4 Enter the recipient information.
1 Select [Fax No. Entry]. 2 Enter the fax number > [OK].
NOTE · Use the numeric keys to enter a number. · When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination
information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 290)
Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 288)
NOTE · When selecting the information from the Address Book, select [Address Book], and specify the
destination > [OK]. Choosing from the Address Book (page 284) · When selecting the information from an External Address Book, select [External Address Book], and specify the destination > [OK]. For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
5 Configure the functions. Scroll the window to display other functions. Send (page 307)
6 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
7 Press the [Start] key.
NOTE A confirmation prompt is displayed on the screen if more than one destination is specified. Confirm and select [Yes]. Sending starts.
281
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs
Canceling Sending Jobs
1 Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed. 2 Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned, Job Cancel appears. When there is a job sending or on standby, Canceling job screen appears. Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]
NOTE Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
282
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Handling Destination
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
Specifying Destination
Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly: · Choosing from the Address Book
Choosing from the Address Book (page 284) · Choosing from the External Address Book
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide · Choosing from One Touch key Choosing from One Touch Key (page 286) · Choosing from the Search (No.) Choosing from the Search (No.) (page 287) · Choosing from the FAX The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. FAX Operation Guide NOTE · You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
Send/Store (page 437) · If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the
other party number using the numeric keypad.
283
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from the Address Book
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following: Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 177)
1 In the Destination screen for sending, select [Address Book] >
NOTE For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
2 Select the destinations. Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. Multiple destinations can be selected. The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server, select [Select] > [Address Book] > [External Address Book]. Select [Name] or [No.] to sort the destination list. NOTE · To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark. · If "Broadcast" is set to [Prohibit], multiple destinations cannot be selected. This also applies to a group in which multiple destinations are registered. Send/Store (page 437) Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.
1 [Filter] Advanced search by type of registered destination (Email, Folder, Fax or Group). (Fax: Only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.) You can set up this function so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed. Address Book (page 444)
284
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination 2 [Search(No.)] or [Search(Name)] Search by registered address number or name. Select either [Search(No.)] or [Search(Name)] to switch between [Search(No.)] and [Search(Name)].
3 Accept the destination > [OK] Destinations can be changed later. Checking and Editing Destinations (page 288) NOTE You can set the default sort setting of the address for the address book. Address Book (page 444)
285
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from One Touch Key
1 In the destination screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE · If the One Touch Key for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select or .
Displays One Touch Keys that are hidden. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered. For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following: Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189) · The No. key has the same function as [Search (No.)] displayed on the touch panel. Use to directly enter a number with the numeric keys, such as specifying a transmission address using a one-touch key number, or calling up a stored program using the program number. For information on onetouch key numbers, refer to the following: Choosing from the Search (No.) (page 287)
286
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Choosing from the Search (No.)
[Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [One-Touch Key] > [Add/Edit One-Touch Key] Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number.
1 In the destination screen for sending, select [Search (No.)] to display the numeric entry screen. Select the number entry field and enter the One-Touch Key number with the numeric keypad. NOTE If you entered the One Touch Key in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].
287
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Checking and Editing Destinations
1 Display the screen. Specify the destination. Specifying Destination (page 283)
2 Check and edit the destination.
Select to display a destination list. · Select (information icon) to check the destination. · Select (delete icon) to remove the destination from the list.
NOTE · When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the confirmation screen appears. Enter the
same destination again, and select [OK]. Send/Store (page 437) · If "Destination Check before Send" is set to On, the confirmation screen appears when the [Start] key is pressed. Send/Store (page 437) Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289)
288
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting On for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the [Start] key. Send/Store (page 437)
1 Move the screen to the bottom and confirm all destinations.
Selecting (information icon) shows the detailed information of the destination. To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [Delete] > [Delete] To add the destination, select [Close] and then return to the destination screen.
2 Select [Check].
NOTE Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.
289
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Re-entering the New Destination
If the "Entry Check for New Dest." is set to on, the re-entering screen for the destination information is displayed. Send/Store (page 437)
Enter the same destination information again, and select [OK].
290
Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination
Recall
"Recall" is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. To send to the same destination again, select [Recall] to call the destination to the destination list.
1 Select [Recall]. The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list. NOTE When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.
2 Press the [Start] key. Sending starts. NOTE · If "Destination Check before Send" is set to On, the destination confirmation screen appears when the [Start] key is pressed. Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 289) · Recall information is canceled in the following conditions. · When you turn the power off · When you send a next image (new recall information is registered) · When you log out
291
Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function
How to use the FAX Function
On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
292
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes
Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users. The following types of document boxes are available: · Job Box · USB Drive Box · Fax Memory RX Box (only for fax-compatible models) · Subaddress Communication Box (only for fax-compatible models) · Polling Box (only for fax-compatible models)
What is Job Box?
Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", and "PIN Print Box". These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE · You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (page 452) · For details on operating the "Private Print/Job Hold Box", "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", or "PIN Print
Box", refer to the following: Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 211)
293
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
What is USB Drive Box?
A USB drive can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data directly from the USB drive without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB drive in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, high compression PDF.
294
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
What is a Fax Memory RX Box/Subaddress Box/Polling Box?
Fax Box store the fax data. The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
295
Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes
Sending Documents to E-mail Address of Logged in User (to myself)
Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
1 Configure the settings. Before using this function, the following are necessary. · The function icon must be displayed in the home screen. Editing the Home Screen (page 64) · An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525)
2 Select the [Home] key 3 Select [Send to Me (Email)].
NOTE When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
296
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Using Removable USB Drive
Plugging USB drive directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB drive without having to use a computer. The following file types can be printed: · PDF file (Version 1.7 or older) · TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) · JPEG file · XPS file · OpenXPS file · Encrypted PDF file In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB drive connected to the machine. The following file formats can be stored: · PDF file · TIFF file · JPEG file · XPS file · OpenXPS file · High-compression PDF file format
NOTE Word, Excel and PowerPoint will be saved in a Microsoft Office 2007 or later file format.
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Drive
NOTE · PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf). · Use USB drive properly formatted by this machine. · Plug the USB drive directly into the USB Memory Slot.
297
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
1 Plug the USB drive.
1 Plug the USB drive into the USB memory Slot.
When the machine recognizes the USB drive, the message "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." appears. 2 Select [Continue]. Displays the USB drive operation screen.
NOTE If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.
2 Print the document.
1 Select the folder containing the file to be printed.
NOTE · 1,000 documents can be displayed. · To return to a higher-level folder, select [Up].
2 Select the file to be printed > [Menu] > [Print]
3 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired. For the features that can be set, refer to the following: USB Drive (Printing Documents) (page 312)
NOTE After a document saved in the machine is selected, [Use File Settings] may appear in the setting screen for the feature to be used. · To use the settings saved with the document, select [Use File Settings]. · If you need to change the print settings, select the desired feature.
4 Press the [Start] key. Printing of the selected file begins.
298
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Saving Documents to USB Drive (Scan to USB)
You can store scanned documents to a removable USB drive. NOTE
The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.
1 Place the original.
Loading Originals (page 237)
2 Plug the USB Drive.
1 Plug the USB drive into the USB Memory Slot.
When the machine recognizes the USB drive, the message "USB Drive is recognized. Displaying files." appears. 2 Select [Continue]. Displays the USB Drive screen.
NOTE If the message does not appear, select [USB Drive] on the Home screen.
299
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
3 Store the document.
1 Select the folder where the file will be stored. 2 Select [Store File]. 3 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following: USB Drive (Store File) (page 310) 4 Check the storing image. 5 Press the [Start] key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB drive.
300
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Check the USB Drive Information
1 In the USB Drive screen, select [Menu] > [USB Info]. 2 Once you confirm the information, select [Close].
301
Operation on the Machine > Using Removable USB Drive
Removing USB Drive
IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB drive.
1 Display the screen. [Home] key > [USB Drive] > [Menu]
2 Select [Remove USB]. When "USB Drive can be safely removed." is displayed, select [OK] then remove the USB drive. NOTE USB drive can also be removed via Device Information. Device Information (page 392) Tapping the USB drive icon shown at the top of the touch panel and selecting [Remove USB] allows you to safely remove the USB drive. Home screen (page 62)
302
Using Various Functions
6 Using Various Functions
About Functions Available on the Machine..........................................................................304 Functions ..................................................................................................................................313
303
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
About Functions Available on the Machine
This machine provides the various functions available.
Copy
Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Original Size] [Paper Selection] [Mixed Size Originals] [Original Orientation] [Collate] [ID Card Copy]
[Zoom] [Combine]
Description
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 313)
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. Paper Selection (page 315)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Originals (page 317)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Original Orientation (page 319)
Prints the output by page or set. Collate (page 320)
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet. ID Card Copy (page 321)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Copying (page 337)
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. Combine (page 340)
304
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [Border Erase] [Duplex]
[Density] [Original Image] [Color Selection] [EcoPrint] [Color Balance] [Hue Adjustment] [Sharpness] [BackgroundDensityAdj.] [Saturation] [Prevent Bleed-thru]
[Contrast]
[Erase Colors] [Continuous Scan]
[Job Finish Notice] [File Name Entry] [Priority Override]
Description
Erases the black border that forms around the image. Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan (page 343) Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals. Copying (page 347) Adjust density. Density (page 322) Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 323) Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 327) EcoPrint saves toner when printing. EcoPrint (page 326) Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Color Balance (page 328) Adjust the color (hue) of images. Hue Adjustment (page 329) Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 331) Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. Background Density Adj. (page 332) Adjust the color saturation of the image. Saturation (page 333) Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. Prevent Bleed-thru (page 334) You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 335) Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 336) Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 350) Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice (page 351) Adds a file name. File Name Entry (page 352) Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. Priority Override (page 353)
305
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [Detect Folded Corner Orig.]
[Skip Blank Page]
Description
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected. Detect Folded Corner Orig. (page 354)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 355)
306
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Send
Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Original Size] [Mixed Size Originals] [Duplex] [Sending Size] [Original Orientation] [File Format] [File Separation] [Density] [Original Image]
Description
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 313)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Originals (page 317)
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. Duplex (page 356)
Select size of image to be sent. Sending Size (page 357)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Original Orientation (page 319)
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. File format (page 359)
Creates a file for each scanned original data page and sends the files. File Separation (page 365)
Adjust density. Density (page 322)
Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 323)
307
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [Scan Resolution] [Fax TX Resolution]
[Color Selection] [Sharpness] [Clarify Text (Noise Removal)]
[BackgroundDensityAdj.] [Saturation] [Prevent Bleed-thru] [Contrast] [Erase Colors] [Border Erase/Full Scan] [Zoom] [Job Finish Notice] [FAX Delayed TX]
[File Name Entry] [Continuous Scan] [Email Subject/Body]
Description
Select fineness of scanning resolution. Scan Resolution, Resolution (page 366)
Select fineness of images when sending FAX. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 327)
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 331)
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Clarify Text (Noise Removal) (page 367)
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. Background Density Adj. (page 332)
Adjusts the color saturation of the image. Saturation (page 333)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. Prevent Bleed-thru (page 334)
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 335)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 336)
Erases the black border that forms around the image. Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan (page 343)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Printing/Sending/Storing (page 339)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice (page 351)
Set a send time. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Adds a file name. File Name Entry (page 352)
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 350)
Adds subject and body when sending a document. Email Subject/Body (page 368)
308
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [Fax Direct Transmission] [Fax Polling RX]
[FTP Encrypted TX] [Detect Folded Corner Orig.]
[Skip Blank Page]
Description
Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling Transmission stored in the polling box. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Encrypts images when sending via FTP. FTP Encrypted TX (page 369)
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected. Detect Folded Corner Orig. (page 354)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and sends only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 355)
309
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
USB Drive (Store File, Printing Documents)
Each function is displayed in the Body when Global Navigation is selected.
For details on each function, see below: USB Drive (Store File) (page 310) USB Drive (Printing Documents) (page 312)
USB Drive (Store File)
For details on each function, see the table below.
Function [Original Size] [Mixed Size Originals]
[Duplex] [Original Orientation]
[Storing Size] [Prevent Bleed-thru]
[Density] [Original Image]
Description
Specify the original size to be scanned. Original Size (page 313)
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. Mixed Size Originals (page 317)
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. Duplex (page 356)
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Original Orientation (page 319)
Select size of image to be stored. Storing Size (page 373)
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin originals. Prevent Bleed-thru (page 334)
Adjust density. Density (page 322)
Select original image type for best results. Original Image (page 323)
310
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
Function [Scan Resolution] [Color Selection] [Erase Colors] [Sharpness] [Clarify Text (Noise Removal)]
[BackgroundDensityAdj.] [Saturation] [Zoom] [Border Erase/Full Scan] [Continuous Scan]
[File Name Entry] [File Format] [Job Finish Notice] [File Separation] [Detect Folded Corner Orig.]
[Skip Blank Page]
[Contrast]
Description
Select fineness of scanning resolution. Scan Resolution, Resolution (page 366)
Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 327)
Erases colors in the source document. Erase Colors (page 336)
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. Sharpness (page 331)
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of the text. Clarify Text (Noise Removal) (page 367)
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. Background Density Adj. (page 332)
Adjust the color saturation of the image. Saturation (page 333)
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. Printing/Sending/Storing (page 339)
Erases the black border that forms around the image. Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan (page 343)
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produces as one job. Continuous Scan (page 350)
Adds a file name. File Name Entry (page 352)
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. File format (page 359)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice (page 351)
Creates a file for each scanned original data page and sends the files. File Separation (page 365)
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected. Detect Folded Corner Orig. (page 354)
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and stores only pages that are not blank. Skip Blank Page (page 355)
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. Contrast (page 335)
311
Using Various Functions > About Functions Available on the Machine
USB Drive (Printing Documents)
Function [Paper Selection]
[Collate] [Duplex] [File Name Entry] [Job Finish Notice] [EcoPrint] [Priority Override] [Encrypted PDF PW] [JPEG/TIFF Print] [XPS Fit to Page]
[Color Selection]
Description
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. Paper Selection (page 315)
Prints the output by page or set. Collate (page 320)
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. Duplex (During printing) (page 349)
Adds a file name. File Name Entry (page 352)
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. Job Finish Notice (page 351)
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. EcoPrint (page 326)
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. Priority Override (page 353)
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data. Encrypted PDF Password (page 375)
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. JPEG/TIFF Print (page 376)
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. XPS Fit to Page (page 377)
Select the color setting. Color Selection (page 327)
312
Using Various Functions > Functions
Functions
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
[Org./Paper/Finishing] Access to the function is indicated by icons. Example: Select [Org./Paper/Finishing] in the Copy screen to use the function.
[Org./SendData Format] Access to the function is indicated by icons. Example: Select [Org./SendData Format] in the Send screen to use the function.
[Functions] Access to the function is indicated by icons. Example: Select [Functions] in the Job Box screen to use the function.
[Functions] Access to the function is indicated by icons. Example: Select [Functions] in the USB Drive screen to use the function.
Original Size
Specify the original size to be scanned. Select [Auto (Non-standard Size)], [Metric], [Inch] or [Others] to select the sending size.
[Auto (Non-standard Size)]
Value
Description
Scans non-standard size originals, and automatically measures and sets the original size.
[Metric]
Value A4, A5-R, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Description Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
313
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Inch]
Value Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, Executive
Description Select from the Inch standard size.
[Others]
Value
Description
16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Custom, Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:
Original/Scan Settings (page 411)
NOTE Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.
314
Using Various Functions > Functions
Paper Selection
Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size. If [Auto] is selected, paper the same size as the original is automatically selected.
NOTE
· Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette. Paper Feeding (page 413)
· Cassette 2 is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
To change the paper size and media type of the multipurpose tray, select [Change Multipurpose Tray Settings] and change the Paper Size and Media Type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Paper Size
[Metric]
Value A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Description Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
[Inch]
Value
Letter, Legal, Statement, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II
Description Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
[Others]
Value
Description
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Custom*1
Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
315
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Size Entry]
Value
Description
Metric X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Enter the size not included in the standard size.*2
If [Size Entry] is selected, use [+], [-], or the numeric keys to set the size of "X" (width) and "Y" (length).
*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following: [Custom Paper Settings] (page 415) *2 The input units can be changed in System Menu. Measurement (page 403)
Media Type
Value Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*1, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*1, Letterhead*1, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8*1
*1 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following: Special Paper Action (page 419) For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following: [Media Type Setting] (page 417)
NOTE
· You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.
[MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
· If paper of the specified paper size is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, the confirmation screen appears. When the setting is [Auto], if the detected size of paper is not loaded, a paper confirmation screen appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and select [Continue]. Copying begins.
316
Using Various Functions > Functions
Mixed Size Originals
Scan the documents of different sizes that are set in the document processor all at once. This function cannot be used if platen is used.
Copying
Value [Off] [Same Width]
[Different Width]
Description
Scans and copies multiple sheets of the same width using the document processor.
Scans and copies multiple sheets of different width using the document processor.
Sending/Storing
Value [Off] [Same Width]
[Different Width]
Description
Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of the same width using the document processor.
Scans and sends/stores multiple sheets of different width using the document processor.
Supported Combinations of Originals
[Same Width] When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows. · A4 and Folio (Legal and Letter)
Example: Folio and A4
[Different Width] The supported combinations of originals are as follows. · Letter, A4, Folio, Legal
317
Using Various Functions > Functions Example: A4, Legal
IMPORTANT When placing originals of different width, arrange the originals so that their left sides and top sides are aligned, and place the originals in alignment with the far width guide. If the originals are not aligned in this way, they may not be scanned correctly, and skewing or original jams may result.
Copy Size
Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.
NOTE This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
318
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Orientation
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set. · Zoom · Duplex · Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan · Combine Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. [Top Edge on Top]
[Top Edge on Left]
319
Using Various Functions > Functions
Collate
Prints the output by set. Value: [Off], [On]
Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of copies as required according to page number.
320
Using Various Functions > Functions
ID Card Copy
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card, both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet. Value: [Off], [On]
321
Using Various Functions > Functions
Density
Make the print darker or lighter. Select [-4] to [4] (lighter to darker) to set the darkness.
322
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image
Select original image type for best results.
Original Image Quality (Copy)
[Text+Photo]
Highlighter Enhancement Value
[Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
NOTE If gray text is not printed completely using [Text+Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
[Photo]
Best for photos taken with a camera.
[Text]
Highlighter Enhancement
Value [Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Printer Output]
Highlighter Enhancement Value
[Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
323
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Graphic/Map]
Highlighter Enhancement Value
[Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
324
Using Various Functions > Functions
Original Image (Send/Print/Store)
[Text+Photo]
Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Highlighter Enhancement
Value [Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Photo]
Best for photos taken with a camera.
[Text]
Light Text/Fine Line
Value Off
On
Description
Best for documents that are mostly text and were originally printed on this machine. Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.
Highlighter Enhancement
Value [Off], [On (Normal)], [On (Bright)]
Description
Select [On (Normal)] to reproduce the color of the text and markings made with highlighter pen. If the colors are not bright enough, select [On (Bright)].
[Text (for OCR)]
NOTE This can be added when the color selected is either Black & White or Auto Color (B&W).
325
Using Various Functions > Functions
EcoPrint
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required. Value: Off, On
326
Using Various Functions > Functions
Color Selection
Select the color setting.
Copying
Item [Auto Color] [Full Color] [Black & White]
Sending/Storing
Item [Auto Color (Color/Grayscale)]
[Auto Color (Color/B & W)]
[Full Color] [Grayscale] [Black & White]
Description Automatically recognizes whether documents are color or black and white. Prints documents in full color. Prints documents in black and white.
Description Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale. Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White. Scans the document in full color. Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image. Scans the document in black and white.
327
Using Various Functions > Functions
Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
[Off]
[On]
[Cyan] [Magenta] [Yellow] [Black]
Item
Description
Move the cursor to adjust each color ("Cyan", "Magenta", "Yellow", "Black"). Value: [-5] to [5]
NOTE This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
328
Using Various Functions > Functions
Hue Adjustment
Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative copies.
The following settings can be set.
[Off] [All]
Item
[Individual]
Description
Adjust hue for all colors. Select or to adjust the hue. Select individual colors to adjust the hue. Select [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Yellow], [Green] or [Cyan] and select or to adjust the hue.
329
Using Various Functions > Functions NOTE
· This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. · These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.
330
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward "Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
Value
Description
[1] to [3] (Sharpen) [-1] to [-3] (Blur)
Emphasizes the image outline. Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
331
Using Various Functions > Functions
Background Density Adj.
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.
If the background color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If selecting [Auto] does not remove the background color, select [Manual] and adjust the density of the background color.
[Off] [Auto] [Manual]
Item
Description
Does not adjust the ground color. Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original. Select [1] to [7] (Lighter to Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
332
Using Various Functions > Functions
Saturation
Adjust the color saturation of the image.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color. Saturation is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals.
Item [-1] to [-3] (Grayish) [1] to [3] (Vivid)
Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.
Description
333
Using Various Functions > Functions
Prevent Bleed-thru
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. (Value: Off / On)
334
Using Various Functions > Functions
Contrast
Adjust the contrast between light and dark of the image.
Item [1] to [4] (Higher) [-1] to [-4] (Lower)
Description Increases the sharpness of colors. Creates smoother colors.
335
Using Various Functions > Functions
Erase Colors
Erases colors in the source document. [Off]
[On]
Value
[Yellow], [Red], [Cyan], [Magenta], [Green], [Blue], [Black]
Description Select the colors to erase. You can select up to 6 colors.
Color Range
Value [1] (Narrower) to [5] (Wider)
Description
Choose a range of colors to erase. For example, if you specify [Yellow] and select [5] (Wider) from the color range, greens and reds close to yellow will be erased.
NOTE If you select only [Black], you cannot set the "Color Range".
336
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
[400%] [200%] [141%] [129%] [115%] [90%] [86%] [78%] [70%] [64%] [50%] [25%]
Maximum A5 A4 Statement Letter B5 A4 Folio A4 A4 B5 Legal Letter A4 A5 Letter Statement Minimum
337
Using Various Functions > Functions
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the value.
338
Using Various Functions > Functions
Printing/Sending/Storing
[100%] [Auto]
Item
Description Reproduces the original size. Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
· To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size. Paper Selection (page 315) Sending Size (page 357) Storing Size (page 373)
339
Using Various Functions > Functions
Combine
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages. The following types of the boundary lines are available.
[Off]
[2 in 1] Layout
Value
[Left to Right/Top to Bottom], [Right to Left/Bottom to Top]
Description Select the page layout of scanned originals.
Border Line
Value
[None], [Solid Line], [Dotted Line], [Positioning Mark]
Description Select the boundary line type.
Original Orientation
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
340
Using Various Functions > Functions
[4 in 1] Layout
Value
[Right then Down], [Left then Down], [Down then Right], [Down then Left]
Description Select the page layout of scanned originals.
Border Line
Value
[None], [Solid Line], [Dotted Line], [Positioning Mark]
Description Select the boundary line type.
Original Orientation
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Layout image (2 in 1)
[Left to Right/Top to Bottom]
[Right to Left/Bottom to Top]
341
Using Various Functions > Functions
Layout image (4 in 1)
[Right then Down]
[Left then Down]
[Down then Right]
[Down then Left]
NOTE · The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5-R, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal,
Statement, Oficio II, and 16K. · When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
342
Using Various Functions > Functions
Border Erase, Border Erase/Full Scan
Erases the black frame created in the original. The border can be erased as follows:
Standard
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width is fixed.
Full Scan
Scan originals without white margins. No border erase.
Border Erase Sheet
Erase the black frame created in the original. Erasing width can be adjusted.
343
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Border]
Value Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
[Back Page]
Value [Same as Front Page], [Do Not Erase]
Description Set the border erase width.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys.
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.
[Border]
Value Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
[Back Page]
Value [Same as Front Page], [Do Not Erase]
Description Set the border erase width.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys.
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Individual Border Erase
You can specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
344
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Border]
Value Centimeters: 0 mm - 50 mm (in 1 mm increments), Inches: 0.00 2.00" (in 0.01" increments)
[Back Page]
Value [Same as Front Page], [Do Not Erase]
[Original Orientation]
Value [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description Set the border erase width.*1 Set the value by using [+] or [-]. Entry can also be made using the numeric keys.
Description For 2-sided originals, select [Back Page] and then select [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Description Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
NOTE · [Full Scan] is not displayed when copying. · The default setting for border erase width can be changed. For details, refer to the following:
[Common] (page 430) · The default setting for back page can be changed. For details, refer to the following:
[Common] (page 430)
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following. Measurement (page 403)
345
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals. The following modes are available.
1-sided>>2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available. 1 Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. 2 Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees. Copies can be bound on the top edge,
facing the same orientation when turning the pages.
2-sided>>1-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. Place originals in the document processor. The following binding options are available. · Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. · Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.
346
Using Various Functions > Functions
2-sided>>2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. Place originals in the document processor.
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6-R, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO B5
Copying
Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided originals to 1-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished documents.
[1-sided>>1-sided]
Disables the function.
[1-sided>>2-sided]
Finishing
Value [BindingLeft/Right], [BindingTop]
Select binding orientation.
Description
Original Orientation
Value
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
347
Using Various Functions > Functions
[2-sided>>1-sided]
Original
Value [BindingLeft/Right], [BindingTop]
Original Orientation
Value [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Description Select the binding direction of originals.
Description Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
[2-sided>>2-sided]
Original
Value [BindingLeft/Right], [BindingTop]
Description Select the binding direction of originals.
Finishing
Value [BindingLeft/Right], [BindingTop]
Select binding orientation.
Description
Original Orientation
Value
Description
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left]
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key. After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying. Copying begins.
348
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex (During printing)
Prints the document on both sides.
[1-sided]
Disables the function.
[Duplex]
Binding
Value Binding [Left/Right]
Binding [Top]
Description
Prints on both sides so that the correct orientation is achieved when binding the paper on the left or right.
Prints on both sides so that the correct orientation is achieved when binding the paper at the top.
349
Using Various Functions > Functions
Continuous Scan
Scan several sets of originals separately and process them as one job. Scanning of originals will continue until [Finish Scan] is selected. Turn the setting On to perform continuous scanning. (Value: Off/On)
350
Using Various Functions > Functions
Job Finish Notice
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It can also be set up to send a notice when a job is interrupted. Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine to finish.
NOTE
· PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX (page 126)
· E-mail can be sent to a single destination. · It is possible to download the scan data to PC from the URL provided in the Job Finish Notice E-mail in
the event of "Send to Folder (SMB/FTP)" or "Storing Documents to a Custom Box". This is a useful function in case if it is not possible to send/receive a large amount of scan data due to the restriction of the mail attachment file size.
Item [Off] [Addr. Book]
[Address Entry]
Description
--
[Addr. Book] Select the notification destination on the address book screen, then select [OK].
(information icon) Information on the selected destination can be viewed.
[Notify when interrupted] Select On if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
Email Address Enter E-mail address directly. Select the entry field, enter the address (up to 256 characters) and select [OK].
[Notify when interrupted] Select On if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.
351
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Name Entry
Adds a file name in the document. Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here. Enter the file name (up to 32 characters). To add a date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add a job number, select [Job No.]. To add both, select [[Job No.] & [Date and Time]] or [[Date and Time] & [Job No.]].
352
Using Various Functions > Functions
Priority Override
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished. (Value: Off/On)
NOTE · This function is not available if current job was an override.
353
Using Various Functions > Functions
Detect Folded Corner Orig.
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected.
Value On
Off
Description
If a bent corner is detected, a message is displayed to stop reading the original. It does not detect.
354
Using Various Functions > Functions
Skip Blank Page
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are not blank. Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters. The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the document. Select [On] > [Detect Items to Skip] and choose [Blank Pages + Ruled Lines], [Blank Pages Only], or [Blank Pages + Some Text].
NOTE The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.
355
Using Various Functions > Functions
Duplex
Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.
[1-sided]
There is no setting for the binding or the original orientation.
[2-sided]
Binding
Value [Left/Right], [Top]
Description Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original Orientation
Value
Description
[Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left], [Auto]*1
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
Select the orientation of the original from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
*1 This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
356
Using Various Functions > Functions
Sending Size
Select size of image to be sent. Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size. [Same as Original Size]
Automatically sends the same size as the original.
[Metric]
Value A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Description Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
[Inch]
Value Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II
Description Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
[Others]
Value
16K, Hagaki, Oufukuhagaki, Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom
Description Select from special standard sizes.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below. · Original size and sending size are the same
Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 313)
Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size].
Zoom Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Zoom (page 337)
· Original size and sending size are different Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 313) Sending Size Select the desired size.
357
Using Various Functions > Functions Zoom Select [Auto]. Zoom (page 337) NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size and select the zoom of [100%], you can send the image as the actual size (no zoom).
358
Using Various Functions > Functions
File format
Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS], [JPEG], [OpenXPS], [High Comp. PDF]. When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality. If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
[PDF]
Value 1 Low Quality (High Comp) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp)
Description
Color Mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/ Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
NOTE
· Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] [PDF/A-1a] [PDF/A-1b] [PDF/A-2a] [PDF/A-2b] [PDF/A-2u]) · Set PDF encryption.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 360) · Set Digital Signature to File.
PDF Electronic Signature (page 363)
[TIFF]
Value 1 Low Quality (High Comp) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp)
[JPEG]
Value 1 Low Quality (High Comp) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp)
Description Color mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
Description Color mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale
359
Using Various Functions > Functions
[XPS]
Value 1 Low Quality (High Comp) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp)
[OpenXPS]
Value 1 Low Quality (High Comp) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp)
[High Comp. PDF]
Value [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], [Quality Priority]
Description Color Mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/ Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
Description Color Mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/ Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White
Description Color Mode: Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/ Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
NOTE
· Set the PDF/A. (Value: [Off] [PDF/A-1a] [PDF/A-1b] [PDF/A-2a] [PDF/A-2b] [PDF/A-2u]) · Set PDF encryption.
PDF Encryption Functions (page 360) · Set Digital Signature to File.
PDF Electronic Signature (page 363)
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password. Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] and select [Encryption]. Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in Compatibility.
If Acrobat 3.0 and later is selected
[Password to Open Document ]
Off, On
Value
Description
Enter the password to open the PDF file. Select On, enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation.
360
Using Various Functions > Functions
[Password to Edit/Print Document]
Off, On
Value
Printing Allowed
Value [Not Allowed], [Allowed]
Changes Allowed
Value [Not Allowed] [Commenting] [Page Layout except extracting Pages] [Any except extracting Pages]
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Value [Disable], [Enable]
Description Enter the password to edit the PDF file. Select On, enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation. When you have entered the password to edit/print document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Description Disables the printing of PDF file.
Description Disables the change to the PDF file. Can only add commenting. Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file. Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file.
Description Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
361
Using Various Functions > Functions
If Acrobat 5.0 and later is selected [Password to Open Document ]
Off, On
Value
Description
Enter the password to open the PDF file. Select On, enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation.
[Password to Edit/Print Document]
Off, On
Value
Printing Allowed
Value [Not Allowed] [Allowed (Low Resolution only)] [Allowed]
Changes Allowed
Value [Not Allowed] [Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages] [Commenting] [Any except extracting Pages]
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Value [Disable], [Enable]
Description Enter the password to edit the PDF file. Select On, enter a password (up to 256 characters). Enter the password again for confirmation. When you have entered the password to edit/print document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Description Disables the printing of PDF file. Can print the PDF file only in low resolution. Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Description Disables the change to the PDF file. Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF file.
Can only add commenting. Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file.
Description Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
362
Using Various Functions > Functions
PDF Electronic Signature
If [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected as a file format, electronic signature can be added to the PDF to be sent. Electronic signature can certify a sender of document and prevent falsification. To use this function, it is required to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer and enable digital signature to files from the system menu. In this manual, a procedure to register a signing certificate from Command Center RX is described as an example.
NOTE · This function can be configured when [Off], [PDF/A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], [PDF/A-2u] is selected in PDF/A. · To register a signing certificate from KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following.
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
1 Access to Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 127)
2 Register a signing certificate to be used in the electronic signature addition setting. 1 From the [Functions] menu, click [Common/Job Defaults]. 2 Click [Settings] in [File Default Settings] > [Signing Certificate] to create or import the device certificate. Command Center RX User Guide 3 Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart entire device] to restart the device.
3 Configure the digital signature settings.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Send/Store] > [Signature to File]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Configure the digital signature addition settings. The following settings can be selected. Digital Signature Select whether to add a digital signature. [Off] Does not add a digital signature. [Specify Each Job] Whether to add a digital signature is selected each time of sending. [On] Always adds a digital signature when sending.
363
Using Various Functions > Functions [Digital Signature Format] Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature. Value: [SHA-1], [SHA-256], [SHA-384], [SHA-512] NOTE This function is displayed when Digital Signature is set to [Specify Each Job] or [On].
Password Confirmation on Signature Permission Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature. Value: [On], [Off] NOTE This function is displayed when Digital Signature is set to [Specify Each Job].
[Password] Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols. NOTE This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on Signature Permission" is set to [On].
3 Select [OK].
4 Display the screen.
1 [Home] key > [Send] > [Org./SendData Format] > [File Format]
5 Configure the settings.
1 Select [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] as a file format. 2 From "Digital Signature", select [On] > [OK] in order.
6 Press the [Start] key.
364
Using Various Functions > Functions
File Separation
Creates multiple files for each scanned original data page. (Values [Off]/[Each Page]) When you select [Each Page], the file size is recalculated.
NOTE A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
365
Using Various Functions > Functions
Scan Resolution, Resolution
Select fineness of scanning resolution. (Values: [600 x 600 dpi]/[400 x 400 dpi Ultrafine]/[300 x 300 dpi]/[200 x 400 dpi Superfine]/[200 x 200 dpi Fine]/ [200 x 100 dpi Normal])
NOTE The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and longer send times.
366
Using Various Functions > Functions
Clarify Text (Noise Removal)
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of characters. Value: [Off]/[On]
367
Using Various Functions > Functions
Email Subject/Body
Adds subject and body when sending a document. Select "Subject"/"Body" to enter the Email subject/body.
NOTE · The subject can include up to 256 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.
368
Using Various Functions > Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
Encrypts images when sending via FTP. Encryption secures the document transmission. (Value: Off / On)
NOTE In Command Center RX, click [Security Settings] [Network Security] in order. Be sure that "TLS" of Secure Protocol Settings is [On] and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside settings. Command Center RX User Guide
369
Using Various Functions > Functions
Email Encrypted TX
Sends encrypted E-mail using the electronic certificate. Encryption secures the document transmission. (Value: Off/On)
NOTE To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in the Command Center RX. Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX (page 371)
370
Using Various Functions > Functions
Digital Signature to Email
Add a digital signature to the email, using the electronic certificate. By adding a digital signature to an email, you can confirm the identity of the destination and detect tampering during transmission. (Value: Off / On)
NOTE To use this function, configure the certificate, protocol and email function in Command Center RX. Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX (page 371)
Configuring S/MIME in Command Center RX
When using the Email Encrypted TX and Digital Signature to Email functions, make the following settings in Command Center RX.
1 Access to Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 127)
2 Register the device certificate which is used for S/MIME.
1 From the [Security Settings] menu, click [Certificates]. 2 Click [Settings] of "Device Certificate" (1 to 5) to create or import the device certificate.
Command Center RX User Guide 3 Click [Restart/Reset] > [Restart entire device] to restart the device.
3 Configure the protocol settings
1 From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocols]. 2 Set [SMTP (E-mail TX)] and [S/MIME] of "Send Protocol" to [On]. 3 Click [Submit].
4 Configure the E-mail function.
1 From the [Functions] menu, click [E-mail]. 2 Configure the settings in "S/MIME Settings" as necessary.
Command Center RX User Guide 3 Click [Submit].
371
Using Various Functions > Functions
5 Link the E-mail address with S/MIME certificates
1 From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book]. 2 Click the contact's [Number] or [Name] you want to edit. 3 Click [Settings] in "S/MIME Certificate". 4 Click [Import] on the required certificate to register it, and then click [Submit]. 5 Click [OK].
372
Using Various Functions > Functions
Storing Size
Select size of image to be stored. Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size. [Same as Original Size]
Automatically sends the same size as the original.
[Metric]
Value A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm
Description Select from the Metric series standard sizes.
[Inch]
Value Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II
Description Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
[Others]
Value
16K, Hagaki, Oufukuhagaki, Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom
Description Select from special standard sizes.
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below. · Original Size and the size you wish to store as are the same
Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 313)
Storing Size Select [Same as Original Size].
Zoom (XY Zoom) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Zoom (page 337)
· Original Size and the size you wish to store as are different Original Size Specify as necessary. Original Size (page 313) Storing Size Select the desired size.
373
Using Various Functions > Functions Zoom Select [Auto]. Zoom (page 337) NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
374
Using Various Functions > Functions
Encrypted PDF Password
Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data. Enter the password, and select [OK].
NOTE For details on entering the password, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
375
Using Various Functions > Functions
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item [Fit to Paper Size] [Image Resolution] [Fit to Print Resolution]
Description Fits the image size to the selected paper size. Prints at resolution of the actual image. Fits the image size to the print resolution.
376
Using Various Functions > Functions
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file. (Value: Off / On)
377
Status/Job Cancel
7 Status/Job Cancel
Checking Job Status.................................................................................................................379 Checking Job History ...............................................................................................................387 Job Operation ...........................................................................................................................390 Device Information..................................................................................................................392 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper .......................................................394
378
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.
The following job statuses are available.
Status Screens Print Job Status
Send Job Status
Store Job Status Scheduled Job
Job status to be displayed
· Copy · Printer · Printing from Document Box · Fax reception · Email reception · Printing data from USB Drive · Application · Printing Report/List · Email · Sending Job Folder · Fax transmission · Sending Job - Fax Server · Sending Job Application · Multiple destination · Scan · Storing Job Fax · Storing Job Printer Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Displaying Status Screens
1 Display the screen. Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the job you want to check. Select the job to check from [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], [Storing Jobs], [Scheduled]. Select [Sending Jobs] [Scheduled] to check delayed transmission. Print Jobs Screen (page 380) Send Jobs screen (page 382) Store Jobs screen (page 384) Scheduled Job Screen (page 385)
379
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Details of the Status Screens
NOTE · You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
Status (page 457) · This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX. For details, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
Print Jobs Screen
1 Accept Time Accepted Time of job
2 Job Name Type / Job Name or file name Copy job Printer job Job from Document Box Fax reception Email reception Data from USB Drive Application Report/List
3 Status Status of job [Processing]: The status before starting to print
380
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status [Printing]: Printing [Waiting]: Print Waiting [Pause]: Pausing print job or error [Canceling]: Canceling the job
4 (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to display. Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 386)
5 [Pause AllPrint Jobs] The current print job is temporarily interrupted. Select again to resume printing.
6 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key. NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other items if needed. Status (page 457)
381
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Send Jobs screen
1 Accept Time Accepted Time of job
2 Destination Icons that indicate the job type / Destination Sending Job Email Sending Job Folder Sending Job Fax Sending Job - Fax Server Sending Job Application Multi Sending
3 Status Status of job [Processing]: The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals [Sending]: Sending [Waiting]: Waiting Sending [Canceling]: Canceling the job [Pause]: Pausing the job
4 (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to display. Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 386)
5 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.
382
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status NOTE
The address and user name can be changed to other items if needed. Status (page 457)
383
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Store Jobs screen
1 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
2 Job Name Icons that indicate the job type / Job Name or file name Storing Job Scan Storing Job Fax Storing Job Printer
3 Status Status of job [Processing]: The status before starting to save, such as during scanning originals [Storing]: Storing data [Canceling]: Canceling the job [Pause]: Pausing the job
4 (information icon) Select the icon of the job whose detailed information you want to display. Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 386)
5 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key. NOTE
The job name and user name can be changed to other items if needed. Status (page 457)
384
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Scheduled Job Screen
1 Accept Time Accepted time of job
2 Destination Icons that indicate the job type / Destination Scheduling Job Fax
3 Start Time Time to start the scheduled job
4 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.
5 [Start Now] Select the job you want to send immediately from the list, and select this key.
385
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs
1 Display the screen. Details of the Status Screens (page 380)
2 Check the information.
1 Select (information icon) for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed. In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting (information icon) in "Status/ Destination". Select (information icon) for the destination to display detailed information. 2 After checking, select [Close].
386
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking Job History
NOTE · Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer. For
details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide · You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log. Status (page 457) · This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX. For details, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job histories are available.
Screen Printing Jobs
Sending Jobs
Job histories to be displayed
· Copy · Printer · Print from Box · Fax reception · Email reception · Printing data from USB Drive · Application · Job Report/List · Email · Sending Job Folder · Fax transmission · Sending Job - Fax Server · Sending Job - Application · Multi Sending
Displaying Job History Screen
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select the job you want to check.
1 Select [Log] and select the job you wish to check.
387
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
1 Display the screen. Displaying Job History Screen (page 387)
2 Check the information.
1 Select (information icon) for the job you want to check.
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed. 2 After checking, select [Close].
388
Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached. Sending Log History (page 428)
389
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen. Printing is paused. When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Pause All Print Jobs] .
390
Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation
Canceling of Jobs
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] keys.
2 Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel]. 3 Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
391
Status/Job Cancel > Device Information
Device Information
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Home] key. 2 Select [...] > [Device Information] Confirmation on the machine status or window for operation will
appear.
2 Check the information. The items you can check are described below. [Identification/Wired Network] You can check ID information such as the model name, serial number, host name and location, and the IP address of the wired network. [Wi-Fi Direct/Wi-Fi] You can check the status of Wi-Fi connection, such as the device name, network name and IP address.
NOTE Displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
[Supplies/Paper] You can check the availability of toner and paper. Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (page 394)
[Fax] You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax ID and other fax information. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
NOTE This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
[USB/Bluetooth] You can check the connection status of USB drive and Bluetooth keyboard. · Select "USB Drive" for [Format] if you wish to format external media.
IMPORTANT When [Format] is selected, all data in the USB drive is erased.
· Select "USB Drive" for [Remove] to safely remove the external media. · Select "Bluetooth" for [Connect] to establish the Bluetooth keyboard connection.
392
Status/Job Cancel > Device Information [Option/Application] You can check information on the options and applications that are used. [Capability/Version] You can check the software version and performance. [Security] You can check the security information on the machine. [Report] You can print various reports and lists. [Remote Operation Status] You can check the situation of remote operation.
393
Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper
On the touch panel, you can check the availability of toner and paper.
1 Display the screen. [Home] key > [...] > [Device Information] > [Supplies/Paper]
2 Check the information. The items you can check are described below. Toner Information The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. Paper You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.
394
System Menu
8 System Menu
Operation Method...................................................................................................................396 System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................398 Device Settings ........................................................................................................................403 Notification/Report.................................................................................................................. 423 FunctionSettings ...................................................................................................................... 430 Network Settings .....................................................................................................................460 Security Settings ......................................................................................................................489 Job Accounting/Authentication..............................................................................................500 Add/Delete Application...........................................................................................................501 Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 502
395
System Menu > Operation Method
Operation Method
Configure settings related to overall machine operation. Change the default settings as appropriate for how you use the machine.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select [System Menu/Counter].
2 Select a function.
1 Displays the System Menu items. Items that are not displayed can be displayed by swiping the screen up and down.
2 Returns to the previous screen. 3 Displays setting items.
Select the key of a function to display the setting screen. 4 Returns to the previous screen.
396
System Menu > Operation Method NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
397
System Menu > System Menu Settings
System Menu Settings
This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.
[Quick Setup Wizard]
The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Energy Saver, Network, E-mail and Security Setup. Quick Setup Wizard (page 97)
[Device Settings]
Configure overall machine operation. Device Settings (page 403)
Item [Language/System of Units]
[Keyboard]
[Date/Time] [Energy saver/Timer] [Display Settings] [Sound] [Original/Scan Settings] [Paper Feeding] [Operation Assist]
[Error Handling] [Toner setting] [Managed by Admin]
Description
Set the language to use for the touch panel display, and select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Language/System of Units (page 403)
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters. Keyboard (page 404)
Configures settings related to the date and time. Date/Time (page 405)
Configure the Energy Saver settings. Energy Saver/Timer (page 406)
Configure the touch panel display settings. Display Settings (page 409)
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. Sound (page 410)
Configure settings for originals. Original/Scan Settings (page 411)
Configure the paper and paper source settings. Paper Feeding (page 413)
It is possible to configure the settings for the Orientation Selection screen display and the Preset Limit on the number of copies that can be made at one time. Operation Assist (page 420)
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. Error Handling (page 421)
Configure the toner settings. Toner Settings (page 422)
Configure whether to manage the machine through administrator. [Managed by Admin.] (page 422)
398
System Menu > System Menu Settings
[Notification/Report]
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Notification/Report (page 423)
Item [Print Report/List] [Sending Log History] [Device Status Notification] [Fax Communication Report]
[History Settings]
Description
Print various reports and lists. Print Report/List (page 423) Configure settings for notices for sending and receiving. Result Report Setting (page 425) Configure settings for toner notices. Low Toner Alert (page 426) Configure settings for Outgoing Fax report and Incoming Fax report. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Fax Communication Report (page 427) Configure settings for printing the history of the machine use. Sending Log History (page 428)
[Function Settings]
Configures settings for copying, sending and Document Box functions. FunctionSettings (page 430)
Item [Function Defaults]
[Copy/Print] [Send/Store] [Email] [Sending Job - Folder] [Fax]
[WSD]
Description
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the [Reset] key is selected. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Function Defaults (page 430)
Configures settings for copying and printing functions. Copy/Print (page 436)
Configures settings for sending and storing functions. Send/Store (page 437)
Configure settings for email transmission and receipt. Email (page 439)
Configures settings for Sending Job Folder functions. Sending Job - Folder (page 441)
Configures settings for fax functions. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Configure settings for WSD Scan and WSD Print. WSD (page 443)
399
System Menu > System Menu Settings
Item [Address Book] [One-Touch Key] [Send and Forward]
[Forward Setting] [Printer]
[Job Box] [Cloud Access Setting] [Subaddress Box]
[FAX Memory RX Box]
[Home] [Status] [Remote Service] [TWAIN/WIA]
[Network Settings]
Configures network settings. Network Settings (page 460)
Item [Network Settings]
Description
Configures Address Book settings. Address Book (page 444) Configures One Touch Key settings. One-Touch Key (page 445) Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images. Send and Forward (page 446) Configure the Forwarding settings. Forward setting (page 447) Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. Printer (page 448) Configure settings for Job Box. Job Box (page 452) Configure settings for Cloud Access Setting. Cloud Access Setting (page 453) Configure settings for Subaddress Box. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide Set whether to perform print immediately for the FAX documents received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide Configure settings for Home screen. Home screen (page 62) Configure settings for Status. Status (page 457) Configures remote services settings. Remote Services (page 458) Set whether to use our proprietary web services. TWAIN/WIA (page 459)
Description
Configure the wired network and Wi-Fi settings. Network Settings (page 460)
400
System Menu > System Menu Settings
Item [Connectivity]
[Others]
Description
Configure the Connectivity settings of this machine to other devices. Connectivity (page 487) Configure other network related settings. Others (page 488)
[Security Settings]
Configures security settings. Security Settings (page 489)
Item [Security Quick Setup]
[Interface Block Setting]
[Device Security Settings] [Authentication Security] [Network]
Description
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu. Security Quick Setup (page 489)
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. Interface Block Setting (page 491)
Configures the device security settings. Device Security Settings (page 492)
Configure security settings for User Authentication. Authentication Security (page 497)
Configure security settings on the network. Network (page 499)
[JobAccounting/Authentication]
Configures settings related to machine management. For details on user login administration, refer to the following: Enable User Login Administration (page 522) For details on job accounting, refer to the following: Enabling Job Accounting (page 557)
[Add/Delete Application]
Configure settings for Application. Add/Delete Application (page 501)
Item [Application]
[Optional Function]
Description
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.*1 Add/Delete Application (page 501) You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Overview of the Applications (page 803)
401
System Menu > System Menu Settings *1 There are currently no application available for this machine.
[Adjustment/Maintenance]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. Adjustment/Maintenance (page 502)
402
System Menu > Device Settings
Device Settings
Configure overall machine operation.
Language/System of Units
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Language/System of Units]
Item [Language] [Measurement]
Description
Set the language to use for the touch panel display. Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Value: [mm], [inch]
403
System Menu > Device Settings
Keyboard
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Keyboard]
Item [Keyboard Layout]
[Keyboard Language] [Optional Keyboard Type]
Description
Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters. Value: [QWERTY], [QWERTZ], [AZERTY]
Follow the English display language.
Select the optional keyboard type. Value: [US-English], [US-English with Euro], [French], [German], [UKEnglish]
404
System Menu > Device Settings
Date/Time
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Date/Time]
Item [Date and Time]
Description
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as Email, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header. Value: [Year] (2000 to 2035), [Month ] (1 to 12), [Day] (1 to 31), [Hour] (0 to 23), [Min.] (0 to 59), [second] (0 to 59) Setting Date and Time (page 77)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.
[Date Format] [Time Zone]
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Value: [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], [YYYY/MM/DD]
Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. Setting Date and Time (page 77)
405
System Menu > Device Settings
Energy Saver/Timer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Energy Saver/Timer]
[Auto Panel Reset]
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Value: Off, On
NOTE For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following: Panel Reset Timer (page 406)
[Panel Reset Timer]
If you select On for Auto Panel Reset, you can set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to On.
[Sleep Timer]
Set amount of time before entering Sleep. Value: 1 to 60 minutes (1-minute increment) Sleep (page 90)
[Sleep Rules] (models for Europe)
Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually: This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery controller is installed. · ID Card Reader
(Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.) · Application Value: Off, On
NOTE If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.
406
System Menu > Device Settings
[Power Off Timer]
Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity. Value: [20 minutes], [1 hour], [2 hours], [3 hours], [4 hours], [5 hours], [6 hours], [9 hours], [12 hours], [1 day], [2 days], [3 days], [4 days], [5 days], [6 days], [1 week]
[Power Off Rule]
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function. Select [On] to set the Power Off mode. · Power Off Rule - Network · Power Off Rule - USB Cable · Power Off Rule - USB Host · Power Off Rule - Application
(Displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.) Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [Power Off Rule - NIC] is set to [Off] the machine does not enter Power Off Mode. Even when [Power Off Rule - Network] or [Power Off Rule - USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.
[Sleep Level] (models except for Europe)
You can set the sleep level. This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery controller is installed.
Item [Quick Recovery] [Energy Saver]
Description
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal Sleep mode. Value: [Quick Recovery], [Energy Saver]
NOTE
Use the Quick Recovery mode only when the computer does not recognize USB-connected devices. Note that this will consume more power.
407
System Menu > Device Settings
Item [Sleep Rules]
Description
Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually: · ID Card Reader
Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated. · Application Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card cannot be recognized.
[Energy Saver Recovery Level]
Select the method of recovery from energy saver. Value:
[Full Recovery] This mode enables the use of all functions immediately. However, this mode saves less energy.
[Normal Recovery] In this mode, you can select the method from the following: enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of desired functions only. If you want to use all functions immediately, select the [Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.
[Power Saving Recovery] This mode enables the use of the functions that you wish to use only. This is the most energy-efficient mode.
[Ping Timeout]
Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "Network Settings". Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
408
System Menu > Device Settings
Display Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Display Settings]
Item
Description
[Display Brightness] [Default Screen] [Wallpaper] [Show Power Off Message] [Quick Setup Registration (Copy)]
[Quick Setup Registration (Send)]
[Quick Setup Registration (Fax)]*1 [Quick Setup Registration (Storing in Box)]
[Quick Setup Registration (Box Print)]
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). Value: [Home], [Copy], [Send], [Fax]*1, [Status], [Job Box], [USB Drive], [Polling Box]*1, [Subaddress Box]*1, [Favorites]
Editing the Home Screen (page 64)
Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: [Off], [Paper Selection], [Zoom], [Density], [Duplex], [Combine], [Collate], [Original Image], [Original Size], [Original Orientation], [Color Selection], [Continuous Scan], [Background Density Adj.]
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: [Off], [Original Size], [Duplex], [Sending Size], [Original Orientation], [File Format], [Density], [Original Image], [Scan Resolution], [Fax TX Resolution]*1, [Color Selection], [Zoom], [Continuous Scan], [Background Density Adj.]
FAX Operation Guide
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: [Off], [Color Selection], [Storing Size], [Density], [Duplex], [Scan Resolution], [Zoom], [Original Orientation], [Original Size], [Original Image], [Continuous Scan], [Background Density Adj.]
Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Value: [Off], [Paper Selection], [Collate], [Duplex], [Color Selection]
*1 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
409
System Menu > Device Settings
Sound
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Sound]
[Buzzer]
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Item
Description
[Key Confirmation]
[Job Finish] [Ready] [Warning] [Optional Keyboard]
Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected. Value: Off, On
Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed. Value: [Off], [On], [Fax Reception Only]*1
Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed. Value: Off, On
Emit a sound when errors occur. Value: Off, On
Emit a sound to confirm key presses with a sound. Value: Off, On
*1 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
[Fax Speaker Volume]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
410
System Menu > Device Settings
Original/Scan Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Original/Scan Settings]
[Auto Detect Original Size]
Set whether to use the document processor to detect the original size. Platen cannot automatically detect the original size.
Item [Auto (Standard Size)]
[Detect Non-standard Size (Copy)]
[Detect Non-standard Size (Send/ Store)] [System of Units] [Legal/OficioII/216 x 340 mm]
Description
Select whether to enable automatic detection of the Standard Size. The size that can be detected is A6, B6, A5, B5, A4, and Folio in the case of centimeter size. For inch size, Statement, Letter, and only one of Legal, Officio II, or 216mm x 340mm. Value: Off, On
Set whether to detect non-standard size documents in the copy function. This setting takes precedence over the automatic (standard size) setting. Value: Off, On
Set whether to detect non-standard size documents in the send or save function. This setting takes precedence over the automatic (standard size) setting. Value: Off, On
Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the originals in centimeter sizes. Select [Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes. Value: [Metric], [Inch]
Since the third item options to be auto detected in inch are similar in size, set which size to use. This function is displayed when "System of Units" is set to [Inch]. Value: [Legal], [OficioII], [216 x 340 mm]
[Custom Original Size]
Set up frequently-used custom original size. The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size. Value
Metric X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
411
System Menu > Device Settings
[Default Original Size]
Set the default value for the original size. Value [Metric]: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm [Inch]: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II [Others]: 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4
[Default Original Size (Platen)]
Set the default value for the Original Size set on the Platen. Select Off to display a confirmation screen before execution of a job. Value [Metric]: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm [Inch]: Letter, Legal, Statement, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II [Others]: 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Younaga 3, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4
NOTE When [Auto (Standard Size)] of [Auto Detect Original Size] is set to Off, this function will not be displayed.
412
System Menu > Device Settings
Paper Feeding
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] Configure the paper and paper source settings.
[Cassette 1 Settings] to [Cassette 2 Settings]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette 1 Settings](to [Cassette 2 Settings])
NOTE [Cassette 2] is displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed. [Cassette 2]: Paper Feeder (250-sheet)
Item [Paper Size]
Description
Select the paper size.
Value (Cassette 1) [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Custom]
Value (Cassette 2) [A4], [A5-R], [A5], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5],[Custom] For custom paper size, set the size for each cassette. [Custom Paper Settings] (page 415)
[Media Type]
Value (Cassette 1) [Plain], [Rough], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
Value (Cassette 2) [Plain], [Rough], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] · To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following: [Media Type Setting] (page 417) · When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear. · To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following: Paper Feed Settings (page 419)
413
System Menu > Device Settings
[MP Tray Settings]
Item [Paper Size]
Description
Select the paper size.
Value: [A4], [A5], [A5-R], [A6], [B5], [B6], [Folio], [216 x 340 mm], [Letter], [Legal], [Statement], [Statement-R], [Executive], [OficioII], [16K], [ISO B5], [Envelope #10], [Envelope #9], [Envelope #6], [Envelope Monarch], [Envelope DL], [Envelope C5], [Hagaki], [Oufukuhagaki], [Youkei 4], [Youkei 2], [Younaga 3], [Nagagata 3], [Nagagata 4], [Custom]
For custom paper size, set the size for each cassette.
[Custom Paper Settings] (page 415)
[Media Type]
Select the media type.
Value: [Plain], [Transparency], [Rough], [Vellum], [Labels], [Recycled], [Preprinted], [Bond], [Cardstock], [Color], [Prepunched], [Letterhead], [Envelope], [Thick], [Coated], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
To change to a media type other than "Plain," refer to the following.
[Media Type Setting] (page 417)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Paper Feed Settings (page 419)
NOTE
The available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below. [Plain], [Labels], [Bond], [Recycled], [Color], [Envelope], [Hagaki], [Coated], [Thick], [High Quality], [Custom 1] to [Custom 8] The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
414
System Menu > Device Settings
[Custom Paper Settings]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Custom Paper Settings]
Set up frequently-used custom paper size. Register one custom size for each paper source. The registered size is displayed when the paper size is selected.
Item [Cassette 1 Size]
Description
Register the custom size used for cassette 1. Value Metric
X: 105 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Inch X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) X=Width, Y=Length
[Cassette 2 Size]
Register the custom size used for Cassette 2. Value
Metric X: 105 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Width, Y=Length
415
System Menu > Device Settings
Item [Multipurpose Tray Size]
Description
Register the custom size used for Multipurpose Tray. Value Metric
X: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments) Inch X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments) X=Width, Y=Length
416
System Menu > Device Settings
[Media Type Setting]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Media Type Setting] Select weight for each media type. The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
Paper Weight
Weight (g/m2) and Media Type
Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1*1 Heavy 2*1 Heavy 3*1
60 g/m2 to 74 g/m2 75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 136 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 164 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal. Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Media Type
Default
[Plain] [Rough] [Vellum] [Labels] [Recycled] [Preprinted] [Bond] [Cardstock] [Color] [Prepunched] [Letterhead] [Envelope] [Thick] [Coated] [High Quality] [Custom 1] to [Custom 8]
[Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 3 (91 - 105g/m2)] [Heavy 1 (106 - 135g/m2)] [Heavy 1 (106 - 135g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 3 (91 - 105g/m2)] [Heavy 3 (164 - 220g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Heavy 2 (136 - 163g/m2)] [Heavy 2 (136 - 163g/m2)] [Heavy 1 (106 - 135g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)] [Normal 2 (75 - 90g/m2)]
For [Custom 1] to [Custom 8], settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
417
System Menu > Device Settings
[Show Paper Setup Msg]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Show Paper Setup Message] Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper is set for each cassette.
Item [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 2]
Value: Off, On
Description
NOTE
[Cassette 2] is displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed. [Cassette 2]: Paper Feeder (250-sheet)
418
System Menu > Device Settings
Paper Feed Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Paper Feed Settings]
[Default Paper Source]
Select the default paper source. Value: [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 2], [MP Tray]
NOTE [Cassette 2] is displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed. [Cassette 2]: Paper Feeder (250-sheet)
[Paper Selection]
Set the default paper selection. Value: [Auto], [Default Paper Source]
[Special Paper Action]
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down due to a combination of copying functions and the way originals are set. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority]. If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below. Example: Printing on Letterhead
Value: [Adjust Print Direction], [Speed Priority]
419
System Menu > Device Settings
Operation Assist
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Operation Assist]
Item [Preset Limit]
[Clear Settings after Job Started]
Description
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Value: 1 to 999 copies
Set whether to reset function settings to their defaults after the job starts. Value: [Clear], [Do Not Clear]
420
System Menu > Device Settings
Error Handling
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Error Handling]
Item [Duplexing Error]
[Paper Mismatch Error]
[Auto Error Clear]
Description
Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media types. Value [1 sided]: Printed in 1-sided. [Display Error]: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray. Value [Ignore]: The setting is ignored and the job is printed. [Display Error]: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. Value: On, Off
NOTE
If you select On for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. The setting range is 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments).
[Continue or Cancel Error Job]
Set which users can cancel or continue operations for jobs which were paused due to an error.
Value: [All Users], [Job Owner Only]
NOTE Administrator can cancel all jobs regardless of this setting.
421
System Menu > Device Settings
Toner Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSetting] > [Toner Settings]
[Color Toner Empty Action]
Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out. Value: [Stop Printing], [Print in Black & White]
NOTE This setting is enabled when original consumables (specified toner) are used.
[Low Toner Alert]
Item [Notify via Operation Panel]
[Notify Externally (Admin.)]
Description
Set whether to display the alert on the operation panel when the toner is low. Value: [Off], [On]
Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the toner is running low. This notification is used for Event Reports, Status Monitors, and SNMPTraps (such as Printing Equipment Management Systems). Value: Off, On
NOTE
If On is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in 1% increments).
[Managed by Admin.]
Configures settings for Managed by Admin. [No(home)]: Small or home office (SOHO) [Yes(Office)]: Mid-scale and above office
422
System Menu > Notification/Report
Notification/Report
Print various reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
Print Report/List
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Notification/Report] > [Print Report/List]
Item [Status Page]
Description
Prints the status page. You can check information such as the current settings, available memory, and installed optional equipments.
[Service Status] [Network Status]
Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
Prints the Network status page. You can check information such as the firmware version, network address, and network protocol of the network interface.
[Print Account Report]
If job accounting is enabled, the total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Print Accounting Report (page 572) 423
System Menu > Notification/Report
[Font List]
Item
Description
Prints the font list. You can check the fonts installed in this machine with a sample.
[Outgoing FAX Report] [Incoming FAX Report] [FAX List (Index)] [FAX List (No.)] [One-Touch List (All)] [One-Touch List (FAX)] [Subaddress Box List] [Application Status] [Configuration List] [Data Sanitization Report]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Prints One Touch List, allowing you to check the destinations that have been registered on the One Touch Keys.
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Prints the Application status. You can check the information of the applications installed on this machine.
Print the system settings as the list.
Prints the data sanitization report.
424
System Menu > Notification/Report
Result Report Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Notification/Report] > "Result Report Setting"
[Send Result Report]
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
Item
Description
[Email/Folder]
[FAX]*1 [Canceled before Sending]*2 [Recipient Format]*2
Automatically print a report of transmission result when Email or SMB/FTP transmission is complete. Value: [Off], [On], [Error Only]
FAX Operation Guide
Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent. Value: Off, On
Select the Recipient Format for the send result report. Value: [Name or Destination], [Name and Destination]
*1 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. *2 Not displayed if both "Email/Folder" and "FAX" are [Off].
[RX Result]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
[Job Finish Notice Setting]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
425
System Menu > Notification/Report
Low Toner Alert
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Notification/Report] > [Low Toner Alert]
[Low Toner Alert]
Toner Settings (page 422)
426
System Menu > Notification/Report
Fax Communication Report
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Notification/Report] > "FAX Communication Report" Configure settings for Outgoing Fax report and Incoming Fax report. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
427
System Menu > Notification/Report
Sending Log History
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Notification/Report] > [Sending Log History]
NOTE For details on the Log History, refer to the following: History Management (page 428)
[Sending Log History]
Item [Auto Sending]
Description
This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.
[Destination] [Subject]
[SSFC] [Personal Information] [Send Log History]
Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.
Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail. Value: Up to 256 characters
Enter the subject of the printed job history with IC card authentication. Value: Up to 256 characters
Select whether to include personal information in the job log. Value: [Include], [Exclude]
You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
History Management
It is possible to perform Log Management for the following logs on this machine.
428
System Menu > Notification/Report
Jobs Log
Log subject Copy/Fax/Scan/Send/Print job completion Print job completion Checking job status/Changing of jobs/Canceling of jobs
Log information Event occurrence date and time Event type Information on users logged in (or users who attempted to log in) Event results (Success/Failure) NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
429
System Menu > FunctionSettings
FunctionSettings
Configures settings for printing, copying, sending and Document Box functions.
Function Defaults
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults]
[Common]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults]
[Common]
Original Orientation (page 319) Clear Settings after Job Started (page 420)
[File Name Entry]
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set. Value File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered. Additional information: [None], [Job No.], [Date and Time], [[Job No.] & [Date and Time]], [[Date and Time] & [Job No.]]
[Border Erase Default]
Set the default width to be erased as a border. Value Metric
0 to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) Inch
0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
NOTE To specify border erase widths around original, set the value in "Border". To specify border erase widths in the middle of original, set the value in "Gutter".
Item [Border Erase to Back Page]
Description
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. Value: [Same as Front Page], [Do Not Erase]
[Zoom]
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. Value: [100%], [Auto]
430
System Menu > FunctionSettings
[DP Read Action]
Set the operation when a document is scanned from the document processor. Value: [Speed Priority], [Quality Priority]
[Platen Scan Operation]
Configure the setting to scan original on the platen. Value: [Prioritize Speed], [Prioritize Image Quality]
[Detect Folded Corner Originals]
Value On
Off
Description
When scanning a document from the document processor, scanning is automatically stopped when a document with a folded corner is detected.
It does not detect.
431
System Menu > FunctionSettings
[Copy/Print]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults] > [Copy/Print]
Item [Original Size]
[Color Selection (Copy)] [Color Balance] [Original Image (Copy)] [Background Density Adj. (Copy)] [Continuous Scan (Copy)] [Prevent Bleed-through (Copy)] [Skip Blank Page (Copy)] [EcoPrint] [Border Erase (Copy)]
[Collate] [JPEG/TIFF Print] [XPS Fit to Page] [Auto % Priority]
Description
Set the default value for the original size. When [ Auto (Standard Size)] is OFF in [Device Setting] > [Original/Scan Setting] > [Original Auto Detect (Original Feed Device)], the size set in the default original size is displayed as an option.
[ Auto (Standard Size)]: On Value: [Auto (Standard Size)], [Auto (Non-Standard Size)]
[Auto (Standard Size)]: Off Value: [Auto (Non-standard Size)], [Original (default size)]
Set the default copying color mode setting. Value: [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Black & White]
Sets the default color balance value. Value: Cyan (-5 to 5), Magenta (-5 to 5), Yellow (-5 to 5), Black (-5 to 5)
Set the default original document type for copying. Value: [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [Graphic/Map], [Printer Output]
Set the default Background Density (Copy). Value: [Off], [Auto], [Manual (Darker 5)]
Select the default Continuous Scan (Copy) setting. Value: Off, On
Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy). Value: Off, On
Set the default Skip Blank Page status. Value: Off, On
Select the EcoPrint default. Value: Off, On
Set the defaults for Border Erase (Copy). Value [Standard], [Border Erase Sheet], [Border Erase Book], [Individual Border Erase]
Set the defaults for Collate. Value Off, On
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. Value: [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], [Fit to Print Resolution]
Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function. Value: Off, On
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed. Value: Off, On
432
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Item [ID Card Copy]
[Duplex]
Description
Select the ID Card Copy default.
[Card Position on Platen] No card position specified or set it to top left. Value: [Free], [Upper Left]
[Finishing Layout] Sets the copy position on the paper to center or top right. Value: [Align Center], [Align Upper Right]
Enables you to print on both sides of the paper. You can print on 1 side of each page for both sides of the original. [1 sided] >> [1 sided] [1 sided] >> [2 sided] [2 sided] >> [1 sided] [2 sided] >> [2 sided] Output: [Binding Left/Right], [Binding Top]
433
System Menu > FunctionSettings
[Send/Store]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults] > [Send/Store]
[Original Size]
Setting
[Color Selection (Send/Store)] [Scan Resolution]
[Fax TX Resolution] [Org. Image (Send/Store)] [Clarify Text (Noise Removal) Settings]
[Background Density Adj. (Send/Store)] [Continuous Scan (Send/Store)] [Continuous Scan (Fax)] [Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store)] [Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store)] [Border Erase/Full Scan (Fax)] [Skip Blank Page (Send/Store)] [File Format]
Description
Set the default value for the original size. When Standard Size Detection is OFF, the size set in the default original size is displayed as an option. These settings are in [Device Settings] > [Original/Scan Settings]. Detection of standard size: On Value: [Auto (Standard Size)], [Auto (Non-standard Size)] Standard Size Detection: Off Value: [Auto (Non-standard Size)], Original Size (default size)
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. Value: [Auto Color (Color/Gray)], [Auto Color (Color/B & W)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], [Black & White]
Select the default scanning resolution for scanning documents. Value: [600 x 600 dpi], [400 x 400 dpi Ultrafine], [300 x 300 dpi], [200 x 400 dpi Superfine], [200 x 200 dpi Fine], [200 x 100 dpi Normal]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Set the default original document type for sending/storing. Value: [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [Text (Fine Line)]
When scanning and sending a document in black and white, it eliminates background noise and improves the legibility of characters. Value: Off, On
Set the default Background Density (Send/Store). Value: [Off], [Auto], [Manual (Darker 5)]
Select the default Continuous Scan (Send/Store) setting. Value: Off, On
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store). Value: Off, On
Set the defaults for Border Erase/Full Scan (Send/Store). Value: [Standard], [Full Scan], [Border Erase Sheet], [Border Erase Book], [Individual Border Erase]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Set the default Skip Blank Page status. Value: Off, On
Set the default type of the files. Value: [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], [High Comp. PDF]
434
System Menu > FunctionSettings Setting
[Image Quality (File Format)] [High Comp. PDF Image] [Color TIFF Compression] [PDF/A]
[File Separation] [Email Subject/Body]
[Duplex]
Description
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS/OpenXPS/Word/Excel/ PowerPoint file quality. Value: [1] Low Quality (High Comp.) to [5] High Quality (Low Comp.) Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files. Value: [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], [Quality Priority] Select the compression method for sending the color documents in the TIFF format. Value: [TIFF V6], [TTN2] Select the default PDF/A setting. Value: [Off], [PDF/A-1a], [PDF/A-1b], [PDF/A-2a], [PDF/A-2b], [PDF/A-2u]
NOTE
If [On] is selected in "Digital Signature", [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/ A-1b] cannot be selected. Send/Store (page 437)
Select the default file separation setting. Value: [Off], [Each Page] Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail. Value Subject: Up to 256 characters can be entered. Body 1: Up to 500 characters can be entered. [1 sided] >> [2 sided] Original binding direction: Binding Left/Right, Binding Top
435
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Copy/Print
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults] > [Copy/Print]
Item [Quick Setup Registration (Copy)]
Description Display Settings (page 409)
436
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Send/Store
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Function Defaults] > [Send/Store]
[Default Screen]
Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key. Value: [Destination], [Address Book], [One Touch Key]
[Prevent Mis-sending Settings]
Item [Destination Check before Send]
[Entry Check for New Dest.]
[New Destination Entry] [Recall Destination] [Broadcast] [Destination History Usage] [Delete Destination History]
Description
Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key when performing sending jobs. Value: Off, On
When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. Value: Off, On
Select whether to permit direct entry of destination. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
Set whether to enable broadcast. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
Allow to use the destination history. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
Delete the destination history.
[Quick Setup Registration (Send)]
Display Settings (page 409)
437
System Menu > FunctionSettings
[Digital Signature to File]
Item [Digital Signature]
Description
Select whether to add a digital signature. Value [Off]
Does not add a digital signature. [Specify Each Job]
Whether to add a digital signature is selected each time of sending. [On]
Always adds a digital signature when sending.
NOTE
When [On] is selected, [PDF/A-1a] and [PDF/A-1b] cannot be selected in "PDF/A". [Send/Store] (page 434)
[Digital Signature Format]
Select an algorithm used for encryption of digital signature. Value: [SHA-1], [SHA-256], [SHA-384], [SHA-512]
NOTE
This function is displayed when Digital Signature is set to [Specify Each Job] or [On].
[Password Confirmation on Signature Permission]
Select whether to confirm password when setting digital signature. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
This function is displayed when Digital Signature is set to [Specify Each Job].
[Password]
Set a password required for setting digital signature. Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
NOTE
This function is displayed when "Password Confirmation on Signature Permission" is set to [On].
438
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Email
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Email]
[Email Settings]
Item [SMTP (Email TX)]
[SMTP Server Name]
Description
Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP. Value: Off, On Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
NOTE Up to 256 characters can be entered.
[SMTP Port Number] [Sender Address]
[Connection Test] [SMTP Auth and Sender Address]
Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number is 25. Value: 1 to 65535 (Port Number)
Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails. Non-delivery report may be sent back to the sender address specified here. It is recommended that you specify an e-mail address that can be received by the device administrator. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256 characters.
Enables you to test if the configured details are operational without sending an E-mail.
When the user login is set to ON, login user name, password and E-mail address of login user are used for SMTP authentication and e-mail sender address. Value
[Use System Settings]
Information set with [Sender Address] is used for SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information.
[Use Login User Information]
Login User information is used for SMTP authentication and E-mail sender address information.
NOTE
If there is no e-mail address set for the user who logged in, the Sender Address set with [Sender Address] is used for E-mail sender address information.
439
System Menu > FunctionSettings
[POP3]
[POP3]
Item
[Remote Printing]
Description
Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3. Value: Off, On Printer (page 448)
440
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Sending Job - Folder
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Sending Job - Folder]
Item [FTP Settings]
[SMB Settings]
Description
Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use this function, set it to On in "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 21. Value: Off, On, 1 to 65535 (Port Number)
Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use this function, set it to [On] in "Protocol Settings". The default port number is 445. Value: Off, On, 1 to 65535 (Port Number)
441
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Fax
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Fax] Configures settings for fax functions. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
442
System Menu > FunctionSettings
WSD
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [WSD]
[WSD Scan]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Description
Select whether to use WSD Scan. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
[WSD Print]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Description
Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX driver use this Enhanced WSD web service. The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
443
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Address Book
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Address Book]
[Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
Configure settings for address book. Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 177)
[Machine Address Book]
Item
Description
[Sort] [Narrow Down] [Edit Restriction]
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book. Value: [No.], [Name (Kana)]
This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is displayed. Value: [Off], [Email], [Folder], [Fax]*1, [Group]
Restrict editing of the address book. If you select [Administrator Only], you can only edit the Address Book by logging in as administrator. Value: [Off], [Administrator Only]
*1 This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
[External Address Book]
You can switch LDAP to [On] or [Off]. Command Center RX User Guide
[Address Book Type]
Select whether the machine's address book or the External Address Book appears when the address book is displayed.
This is displayed only if the external address book is available.
Value: [Machine Address Book], [External Address Book]
444
System Menu > FunctionSettings
One-Touch Key
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [One-Touch Key]
Item [Add/Edit One-Touch Key]
[Edit Restriction]
Description
Configure settings for One Touch Key. Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (page 189)
Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If you selected [Administrator Only], you can only edit the One Touch Key by logging in with administrator privileges. Value: [Off], [Administrator Only]
445
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Send and Forward
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Send and Forward]
[Forward Settings]
Select whether to forward the original. Value: Off, On
NOTE If you select On, select the forwarding conditions from the following: · [Email] · [Folder (SMB)] · [Folder (FTP)] · [Fax]
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
[Destination]
[Add]
Item
Description
Set the destination to forward the original. Only one destination can be set. The registration method of the destination is the following. · Addr. Book · Email · SMB · FTP Specifying Destination (page 283)
446
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Forward setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Forward setting] Configure the transfer settings. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
447
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Printer
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Printer]
[Emulation]
Item
Description
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers. Value: [PCL6], [KPDL], [KPDL (Auto)]
NOTE
· When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too. · When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error
Report", too.
[Color Setting] [Print GR with K Toner]
[Gloss Mode]
KPDL Error Report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is output.
Value: Off, On
You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white. Value: [Color], [Black & White]
Configure settings for Print GR with K toner. [Photo] Value: [Off], [On] [Graphics] Value:[Off], [On] [Text] Value:[Off], [On]
Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes longer time. Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
This function is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as the paper type setting.
Paper Feeding (page 413)
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper. To reduce curl, try using thicker paper.
[EcoPrint]
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
448
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Item [Override A4/Letter]
[Duplex] [Copies] [Reduced Print]
Description
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. Value
Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source.
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. Value: [1-sided], [2-sided (Bind Long Edge)], [2-sided (Bind Short Edge)]
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. Value: 1 to 999 copies
Configure settings for reducing the print data and printing (reduced printing). Set the paper size before reduction and reduction ratio.
NOTE
In reduced printing, unlike the print result of 1x size, the line width of characters may not be constant, or lines may be seen in figures, images, patterns, etc. Also, thin lines may not be printed. Also, if you print the barcode in reduced size, it may not be readable.
[Orientation] [Form Feed Timeout]
[LF Action] [CR Action] [Job Name]
Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape]. Value: [Portrait], [Landscape]
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds. Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). Value: [LF Only], [LF and CR], [Ignore LF]
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). Value: [CR Only], [LF and CR], [Ignore CR]
Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed. Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select On, select from [Job Name], [Job No. & Job Name] or [Job Name & Job No.] to use as the job name.
449
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Item [User Name] [Paper Feed Mode]
[MP Tray Priority]
[Auto Cassette Change]
Description
Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed. Value: Off, On
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. Value
[Auto] Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
[Fixed] Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed. Value
[Off] The printer driver settings are followed.
[Auto Feed] If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.
[Always] If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing. Value: Off, On
NOTE
· When selecting Off, the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette #." (# is a cassette number) or "Add paper in Multipurpose Tray.", and stops printing.
· When you load the paper in the cassette displayed in the message, printing resumes.
· If you wish to print from another cassette, select the desired paper source with [Paper Selection].
· When selecting On, the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette contains the same paper as the currentlyused cassette.
[Wide A4]
Turn this to On to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
450
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Item [Resolution]
Description
Set the resolution used for printing. Value: [600 dpi], [1200 dpi]
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel settings.
[KIR] [Printing Job Terminator]
[Remote Printing]
Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting. Value: Off, On
You can select the condition which is regarded as a job termination if the print job could not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason. Value
[EOJ (End of Job)]
The command recognized as a termination of the job data is regarded as one job until it is detected.
[End of Network Session]
The data included in a network session at network connection is regarded as one job.
[UEL (Universal Exit Language)]
The UEL included in the termination of the job data is regarded as one job until it is detected.
Select whether to prohibit printing that is performed without operating the machine. When [Prohibit] is selected, a document that has been stored in the document box from the printer driver can be printed from the machine. This prevents another person from seeing that document. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
NOTE
If [Prohibit] is selected, printing and storing using Quick Copy and Proof and Hold functions are disabled. Printing a received FAX (optional) is not prohibited.
[Direct Printing from Web]
Set whether to allow Direct Printing from Command Center RX. Value: [Not Allowed], [Allowed] Command Center RX User Guide
451
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Job Box
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Job Box]
Item [Quick Copy Job Retention]
Description
To maintain free space in the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
[Deletion of Job Retention]
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
Value: [Off], [1 hour], [4 hours], [1 day], [1 week]
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.
[Deletion of PIN Print at Power Off]
[Storage Media]
Set whether or not the jobs stored in the PIN Print Box is deleted when the power is turned off. Value: [Off], [On]
Set the save destination of the Job Box. Displayed when the optional SD card is installed. Value: [SD Card]
452
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Cloud Access Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Connect to Cloud Access]
Item [Connect to Cloud Access]
[Edit Restriction]
Description
Select whether to use Connect to Cloud Access. Value: [Off], [On] Select Edit Restriction. This function is displayed when [Connect to Cloud Access] is set to On. Value: [Off], [Administrator Only]
453
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Subaddress Box
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Subaddress Box] Registers a subaddress box that uses subaddress based communication. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
454
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Fax Memory RX Box
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Fax Memory RX Box] Set whether to perform print immediately for the FAX documents received or to save them in the Fax Memory RX Box. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. For details, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
455
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Home
[System Menu/Counter] key > [FunctionSettings] > [Home] Configure settings for Home screen. Editing the Home Screen (page 64)
456
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Status
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Status]
[Job Status/Logs Settings]
Set the display of Job Status/Jobs History.
Item [Display Jobs Detail Status] [Display Jobs Log] [Display FAX Log]
[Pause/Resume of All Print Jobs]
Description
Value: [Show All], [My Jobs Only], [Hide All] Value: [Show All], [My Jobs Only], [Hide All] Value: [Show All], [My Jobs Only], [Hide All] This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Value: [Prohibit], [Permit]
457
System Menu > FunctionSettings
Remote Services
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Remote Services] When the trouble occurs on this product, it is possible to explain the operational procedure and the troubleshooting method through the internet from our sales office by accessing the operation panel screen of this product while operating the screen. Value: Off, On
NOTE When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company. Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.
458
System Menu > FunctionSettings
TWAIN/WIA
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [TWAIN/WIA]
NOTE The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. If you select [Off], the WIA driver, TWAIN driver, and Network FAX driver are not available.
[Enhanced WSD]
Set whether to use our proprietary web services.
Item [Available Network] [Protocol Settings]
Value: [Disable], [Enable] Value: Off, On
[Enhanced WSD over TLS]
Set whether to use our proprietary web services.
Item [Available Network] [Protocol Settings]
Value: [Disable], [Enable] Value: Off, On
Description Description
459
System Menu > Network Settings
Network Settings
Configures network settings.
Host Name
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Host Name]
Item [Host Name]
Description
Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX. Changing Device Information (page 129)
460
System Menu > Network Settings
Proxy
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Proxy]
[Proxy]
Item
[Proxy Server (HTTP)] [Proxy Server (HTTPS)]
[Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains]
Description
Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application. Value: [Off], [Use Different Proxy Server], [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols]
Set a proxy server (HTTP). Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Proxy" is set to [Use Different Proxy Server]. Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
Set domains for which no proxy is used. Value: (Enter the domain name.)
461
System Menu > Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Direct Settings] Set Wi-Fi Direct Settings.
NOTE This function is displayed when Wi-Fi module is installed.
Item [Wi-Fi Direct] [Device Name]
[IP Address]
[Auto Disconnect]
[Persistent Group]
[Frequency Band]
Description Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct. Value: Off, On Specify the device name.
NOTE · Up to 32 characters can be entered. · This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to On.
Check the IP address of the machine. TCP/IP Settings (page 470)
NOTE This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to On.
Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct. Value: Off, On
NOTE · If you select On, set the waiting time for automatic disconnection. · This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to On.
Set whether Wi-Fi Direct connection as Persistent Group (information for the connection is kept even if the power is turned off). Value: Off, On
NOTE This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to On.
Set the frequency band to be used. Value: [2.4 GHz], [5 GHz]
462
System Menu > Network Settings
[Password]
Item
Description
Select whether the Wi-Fi Direct password is automatically generated or created manually. When "Manual Creation" is set to ON, the "Persistent Group" setting changes to ON. Value: Off, On
NOTE
If "Manual Creation" is set to ON, set a password (8 or more characters).
463
System Menu > Network Settings
Wi-Fi Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wi-Fi Settings] Set Wi-Fi Settings.
NOTE This function is displayed when Wi-Fi module is installed.
Wi-Fi
[Wi-Fi]
Item
Description
Select whether to use Wi-Fi. Value: Off, On
Setup
When [Wi-Fi ] is On, the following items are displayed.
[Available Network]
Displays access points to which the machine can connect. Select [Menu] > [Refresh] to refresh the access point list.
[Reload] [Index]
Item
Description
Displays access points to which the machine can connect. Select [Menu]>[Reload] to refresh the access point list. Select the key index of the access point. Value: 0 to 3
[Push Button Method]
If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE The push button method supports only the WPS.
[PIN Code Method (Device)]
Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
[Custom Setup]
The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
464
System Menu > Network Settings
Item [Network Name (SSID)]
Description Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE Up to 32 characters can be entered.
[Network Authentication] [Encryption]
Select network authentication type. Value: [Open], [WPA2/WPA-PSK], [WPA2-PSK], [WPA2/WPA-EAP], [WPA2EAP], [WPA3-SAE/WPA2-PSK], [WPA3-SAE], [WPA3/WPA2-EAP], [WPA3EAP]
Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication setting.
Open
Value: [Disable], [WEP]
NOTE
If you selected [WEP], set the WEP key (up to 26 characters) and WEP Key Index (0 to 3).
WPA2/WPA-PSK Value: [AES], [Auto], [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters)
WPA2-PSK Value: [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters)
WPA2/WPA-EAP Value: [AES], [Auto]
WPA2-EAP Value: --
WPA3-SAE/WPA2-PSK Value: [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters)
WPA3-SAE Value: [Preshared Key] (up to 64 characters)
WPA3/WPA2-EAP Value: --
WPA3-EAP Value: --
465
System Menu > Network Settings
Item [Preshared Key]
Set the Preshared key.
Description
NOTE Up to 64 characters can be entered.
466
System Menu > Network Settings
TCP/IP Settings
TCP/IP
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol. Value: Off, On
[IPv4 Settings]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when TCP/IP is On.
DHCP
Item
Auto-IP
IP Address
Description
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server. Value: Off, On Select whether to use Auto-IP. Value: Off, On Set the IP address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet mask. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
DNS Server Address
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Use DNS Server from DHCP], [Use the following DNS Server]
NOTE
When [Use the following DNS Server] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into "DNS Server (Primary)" and "DNS Server (Secondary)".
467
System Menu > Network Settings
Item DNS over TLS
Description
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS. Value: [Off], [On],
IMPORTANT · When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[IPv6 Settings]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when TCP/IP is On.
IPv6
Item
Select whether to use IPv6. Value: Off, On
Description
NOTE
Selecting ON displays IP address in "IPAddr.(LinkLocal)" after restarting the network.
Manual Setting
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). Value
IP Address (Manual) 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length 0 to 128
Default Gateway 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE · This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · To enter "Default Gateway", set "RA (Stateless)" to Off.
468
System Menu > Network Settings
Item RA (Stateless)
Description
Select whether to use RA (Stateless). Value: Off, On
NOTE
· This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · Selecting On displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after
restarting the network.
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. Value: Off, On
NOTE
· This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · Selecting ON displays IP address in IP Address (Stateful) after
restarting the network.
DNS Server Address
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Use DNS Server from DHCP], [Use the following DNS Server]
NOTE
When [Use the following DNS Server] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into "DNS Server (Primary)" and "DNS Server (Secondary)".
DNS over TLS
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off], [On], [Auto]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
469
System Menu > Network Settings
Wired Network Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wired Network Settings] Configure Wired Network Settings.
TCP/IP Settings
TCP/IP
Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol. Value: Off, On
[IPv4 Settings]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when TCP/IP is On.
DHCP
Item
Auto-IP
IP Address
Description
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server. Value: Off, On Select whether to use Auto-IP. Value: Off, On Set the IP address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
Subnet Mask
Set the IP subnet mask. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
Default Gateway
Set the IP gateway address. Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE When DHCP is set to On, the value cannot be entered.
470
System Menu > Network Settings
Item DNS Server Address
Description
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Use DNS Server from DHCP], [Use the following DNS Server]
NOTE
When [Use the following DNS Server] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into "DNS Server (Primary)" and "DNS Server (Secondary)".
DNS over TLS
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS.
Value: [Off], [On],
IMPORTANT · When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. · After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[IPv6 Settings]
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when TCP/IP is On.
IPv6
Item
Select whether to use IPv6. Value: Off, On
Description
NOTE
Selecting ON displays IP address in "IPAddr.(LinkLocal)" after restarting the network.
471
System Menu > Network Settings
Item Manual Setting
Description
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). Value
IP Address (Manual) 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length 0 to 128
Default Gateway 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of fourdigit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE · This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · To enter "Default Gateway", set "RA (Stateless)" to Off.
RA (Stateless)
Select whether to use RA (Stateless). Value: Off, On
NOTE
· This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · Selecting On displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after
restarting the network.
DHCP
Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. Value: Off, On
NOTE
· This function is displayed when "IPv6" is set to On. · Selecting ON displays IP address in IP Address (Stateful) after
restarting the network.
DNS Server Address
Set the IP address of DNS (Domain Name System) server. Value: [Use DNS Server from DHCP], [Use the following DNS Server]
NOTE
When [Use the following DNS Server] is selected, enter the DNS server IP address into "DNS Server (Primary)" and "DNS Server (Secondary)".
472
System Menu > Network Settings
Item DNS over TLS
Description
Set whether to connect to a DNS server during communication protected by TLS. Value: [Off], [On], [Auto]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
473
System Menu > Network Settings
Others
Item [LAN Interface]
Description
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. Value: [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half], [100BASE-TX Full], [1000BASE-T]
IMPORTANT After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
474
System Menu > Network Settings
Protocol Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings] Configures protocol settings.
[SMTP (Email TX)]
Email (page 439)
[POP3 (Email RX)]
Email (page 439)
[FTP Client (Transmission)]
Sending Job - Folder (page 441)
[FTP Server (Reception)]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Description
Set whether to send documents using FTP.*1 Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
[SMB Client (Transmission)]
Sending Job - Folder (page 441)
[SMB Server (Reception)]
Sending Job - Folder (page 441)
[NetBEUI]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Description
Set whether to send documents using NetBEUI.*1 Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
[WSD Scan]
WSD Scan (page 443)
[WSD Print]
WSD (page 443)
475
System Menu > Network Settings
[ThinPrint]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Settings
Set whether to use ThinPrint. To use it, select On in these settings. The factory default port number is 4000.*1*2 Value: Off, On
NOTE
This feature does not appear if the optional ThinPrint Option is not running.
[ThinPrintoverTLS]
To use ThinPrint over TLS, select [On] for this setting, and for [TLS] in the "SecuritySettings", select [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the setting is On, TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine.
[Available Network]
[LPD]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
[Raw]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set whether to send documents using LPD.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set whether to receive documents using the Raw Port.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
476
System Menu > Network Settings
[IPP]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
[IPP over TLS]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Description
Set whether to send documents using IPP. To use it, select On in these settings, and select [Off] in [TLS] from "SecuritySettings". Then select [Not Secure (IPPS & IPP)] in the security settings from Command Center RX. The default port number is 631. Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number) Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Settings
Sets whether to receive documents using TLS-protected IPP. To use it, select On in these settings, and select [On] in [TLS] from "SecuritySettings". The factory default port number is 443.*1*2 Value: Off, On, 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
When the setting is On, TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine.
[Available Network]
[HTTP]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
[HTTPS]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set whether to communicate using HTTP.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1*2 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
477
System Menu > Network Settings
[LDAP]
Select whether to use LDAP. Value: Off, On
[SNMPv1/v2c]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
[SNMPv3]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
[Enhanced WSD]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Description Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1 Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select [Off], the WIA driver, TWAIN driver, and Network FAX driver are not available.
[Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired.
Value: [Disable], [Enable]
478
System Menu > Network Settings
[Enhanced WSD over TLS]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Description
Set whether to use our proprietary Web service on TLS.*1*2 Value: Off, On
NOTE
If you select [Off], the WIA driver, TWAIN driver, and Network FAX driver are not available.
[Available Network]
[eSCL]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network][Available Network]
[eSCL over TLS]
Item [Protocol Settings] [Available Network]
[VNC (RFB)]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Sets whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1 Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Sets whether to receive scanned documents using TLS-protected eSCL. Value: Off, On Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
Description Set when using a remote operation by starting up a VNC Viewer other than ours (example: Real VNC). The default port number is 9062.*1 Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number) Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
479
System Menu > Network Settings
[VNC (RFB) over TLS]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Description
Set when using a remote operation protected by TLS by starting up a VNC Viewer other than ours (example: Real VNC). The default port number is 9063.*1*2 Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
When the setting is On, TLS certificate is required. The factory certificate is the certificate owned by the machine.
[Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired.
Value: [Disable], [Enable]
[Enhanced VNC (RFB) over TLS]
Item [Protocol Settings]
Description
Start Command Center RX and set for using TLS-protected remote operation. The default port number is 9061.*1*2 Value: [Off], [On], 1 to 32767 (Port Number)
NOTE
· The factory default setting is [On]. · When the setting is On, TLS certificate is required. The factory
certificate is the certificate owned by the machine. Command Center RX User Guide
[Available Network]
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired.
Value: [Disable], [Enable]
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network. *2 In "SecuritySettings" set [TLS] to [On]. Network (page 499)
IMPORTANT
Depending on the protocol, it may be necessary to restart the network or turn the power off/on after changing the settings.
480
System Menu > Network Settings
Ping
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Ping]
[Ping]
Item
Description
Check if you can communicate with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the destination.
NOTE
This function is not displayed when [Primary Network (Client)] is specified in [Optional Network]. Others (page 488)
[Ping Timeout]
Energy Saver/Timer (page 406)
481
System Menu > Network Settings
Bonjour
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Bonjour]
Item [Protocol Settings]
[Available Network]
Description
Select whether to use Bonjour. Value: Off, On
Set whether to enable this function for each network of Wi-Fi Direct, Wi-Fi and wired. Value: [Disable], [Enable]
482
System Menu > Network Settings
IP Filter (IPv4)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Item [IP Filter (IPv4)]
Description
Configure the IP Filter Setting. IP Filter is a function to restrict the access to the machine by the IP address and protocol. The IP address or network address of permitted hosts is set from Command Center RX. Not setting the IP Filter will allow access from all hosts. Value: [Off], [On] Command Center RX User Guide
483
System Menu > Network Settings
IP Filter (IPv6)
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [IP Filter (IPv6)]
Item [IP Filter (IPv6)]
Description
Configure the IP Filter Setting. IP filter is a function used to restrict the access to the machine by setting the IP address and protocol. The IP address or network address of permitted hosts is set from Command Center RX. Not setting the IP Filter will allow access from all hosts. Value: [Off], [On] Command Center RX User Guide
484
System Menu > Network Settings
IPSec
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [IPSec]
[IPSec]
Item
Description
Set whether or not you use the IPSec. Value: [Off], [On]
485
System Menu > Network Settings
Restart the network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Restart Network]
Item [Restart Network]
Restarts the network.
Description
486
System Menu > Network Settings
Connectivity
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Connectivity"
[Bluetooth Settings]
[Bluetooth]
Item
[Device]
Description
Bluetooth keyboard is used. Value: Off, On Select a keyboard.
[Fax Server]
Item [Fax Server]
[Address Settings]
Description
Select whether to use the Fax Server. Value: [Off], [On] Set the prefix, suffix and domain name to attach to the destination.
NOTE
For information about the fax server, contact the fax server administrator.
[File Format]
Set the default type of the files. Value: [PDF], [TIFF], [XPS]
[Remote Operation]
Configures remote operation settings. Value: Off, On If you select On, set the restriction. Value: [Off], [Use Password], [Administrator Only] If you selected Off, users with no administrator privileges can perform remote operation. If you selected [Use Password], enter the password for remote operation. If you selected [Use Password], enter the password for remote operation.
NOTE If you selected [Administrator Only], remote operation from VNC software is not possible.
487
System Menu > Network Settings
Others
[System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Others"
Item [Primary Network (Client)]
[Restart Entire Device]
Description
Select the network interface to be used for the send function that this machine functions as a client, the network authentication and connecting to external address book. Value: [Wi-Fi], [Wired Network], [Wi-Fi Module]
· [Wi-Fi] is displayed when Wi-Fi module is installed.
· E-mails can be set and used separately through "[Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]".
You can restart the device without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
488
System Menu > Security Settings
Security Settings
Configures security settings.
Security Quick Setup
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup]
Item [Security Quick Setup]
Description
Select security settings from levels 1 to 3 that are close to your environment, and change (customize) the functions as needed. Value
[Level 1] The factory default setting.
[Level 2] The security function of the network will change.
[Level 3] All functions that protect the machine are enabled, and functions that do not protect the machine are disabled.
NOTE
· This function can be set only when logged in with administrator privileges.
Log in as Machine Administrator or Administrator (page 123)
· Restart the device or network after selecting a level for the settings to take effect.
Others (page 488)
· If you change the security settings after selecting a level, the security quick setups will show as "Custom".
· For more information on each security level setting, refer to the following:
Security Quick Setup Function List (page 833)
489
System Menu > Security Settings
Configuring Security Quick Setup
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > [Security Quick Setup] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select the security level according to the usage environment. 3 Configure the security function as necessary.
NOTE Refer to the following for the settings of each security level. Security Quick Setup Function List (page 833)
4 Restart the device or network. Others (page 488)
490
System Menu > Security Settings
Interface Block Setting
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Interface Block Setting"
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.
[USB HOST]
Item
[USB Device]
[USB Drive]
Description
This locks and protects the USB port (USB host). Value: [Unblock], [Block] This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device). Value: [Unblock], [Block] This locks and protects the USB memory slot. Value: [Unblock], [Block]
NOTE
This function can be configured when the USB host is set to [Unblock].
[Restart Entire Device]
Restart the machine without turning the power switch off.
IMPORTANT
Restart the Device or turn the power off and on to reflect the change in the "Interface Block Setting".
491
System Menu > Security Settings
Device Security Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings "
Item [Unusable Time]
[Job Status/Job Logs Settings] [Security Level]
Description
Set a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
Status (page 457)
Specify the security level. Value
[Low] This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
[High] This is the security setting we recommend. Normally use this setting.
[Very High] In addition to the [High] state, disables changing of machine settings with external commands.
NOTE
This function can be set only when logging in with the authority of the device administrator. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525)
[Remote Printing] [RAM Disk Setting]
Printer (page 448)
Create a RAM disk and set its capacity. You can print data from the job box by creating a RAM disk. [RAM Disk Size] Value: Off, On
NOTE
· If On is selected, set the size. Setting range varies depending on size of onboard memory and optional memory usage.
· This feature does not appear if the optional SSD is installed.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
492
System Menu > Security Settings
Item [Software Verification]
[Authentic. on FW Update] [Allowlisting]
Description
Verify the software in the machine. Select [Start] to run the verification. If you experience any abnormalities in software verification, contact your service representative.
Request administrator to approve when updating firmware. Value: [Off], [On]
In case if the unauthorized program or the program that has tampered are installed, the stored data or the contents of the communication in this program might be stolen. Once this function is activated, execution of the unauthorized software or the tampering of the software can be prevented, and possible to maintain the reliability of the system. Value: [Off], [On]
NOTE
· After setting it to [On], you need to shut down and restart the machine.
· Enabling this feature slows the machine start-up.
· If malware is detected, an event report can be used as a way to understand its content. The Event reports can be enabled by the Command Center RX > "Management Settings: Notification/ Report" > [Recipient 1 E-mail Address] to [Recipient 3 E-mail Address] and [Notify when Malicious Program is Detected] is set to [On].
[Data Security]
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Device Security Settings " [Data Security] Configure settings related to data stored in SSD or memory.
[SSD Initialization]
Change the security feature settings.
NOTE · This feature appears when an optional SSD is installed and the optional security kit is running. · To change security feature settings, you must enter a security password. The factory default value is
000000.
493
System Menu > Security Settings
Item [Security Password]
Description
Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the Data Encryption/Overwrite. Enter a new security password 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Enter the password again for confirmation.
IMPORTANT
Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or 12345678).
[System Initialization]
You can completely erase the contents of the SSD. Do so when you want to stop using the machine.
IMPORTANT
If the power switch is turned off during initialization, the SSD may be damaged and the initialization may not complete.
NOTE If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch on again. Initialization automatically restarts.
[Data Sanitization]
This function returns the following information stored in the machine to the factory default. · Address Book · Favorite Data · System Settings · Fax Send/Receive/Transfer Data · Outgoing and Incoming Fax Log · Local Fax Station Name · Local Fax Station Number · Data in the Custom Box · Optional applications
NOTE · Print "Data Sanitization Report" and check that security data has definitely been erased.
Print Report/List (page 423) · You cannot cancel a process in the middle. · Disconnect any modular or network cables before performing this operation. · Before executing this function, set all [Interface Block Setting] to [Unblock].
494
System Menu > Security Settings
Interface Block Setting (page 491) · Do not turn off the power during data sanitization. If the power is turned off during erasing, erasing will
be performed automatically after the power is turned on, but complete operation cannot be guaranteed.
Item [Run Immediately] [Reserve a Sanitization Time]
[Device Use After Sanitization]
[Data Sanitization Report]
Settings
Execute security data sanitization.
The address information and image data in the machine will be completely erased at the specified time. Value: [On], [Off] If you select [On], set the date and time for complete erasure. Value: Year (2000 to 2035), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), and Hour (0 to 23).
After data sanitization, the usage of this machine will be restricted. If [Prohibit] is selected, machine operation is disabled. Value: [Permit], [Prohibit]
Prints the data sanitization report.
495
System Menu > Security Settings
Items to be deleted
Classification Device/Job
Fax (only for fax-compatible models)
Application/program
Data to be deleted
· The job settings set by the user · Network Settings · Image data saved in the document box · Data registered in One-Touch key · Jobs History · User information (user list, address book, document box registered
by the user) · Account information of job accounting · Network certificate · Initial screen on machine changed by service representative · Fax settings configured by users · Communication restriction settings · Encryption key settings · Transmission histories · Scheduled Job · Conditional reception/forwarding settings · Application/favorite added by a user or service representative · Trial function
496
System Menu > Security Settings
Authentication Security
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Authentication Security" Configure security settings for User Authentication. Authentication Security (page 523)
497
System Menu > Security Settings
Unknown User Settings
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Unknown User Settings" This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID.
NOTE This function is displayed when User Login Administration or Job accounting is set to On. Unknown User Settings (page 577)
498
System Menu > Security Settings
Network
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Security Settings] > "Network"
[TLS]
Item
[Network Access]
Description
Set whether to use TLS for communication. Value: [Off], [On] Set whether to use SNMP or IPSec for communication. Protocol Settings (page 475) Protocol Settings (page 475) IPSec (page 485)
499
System Menu > Job Accounting/Authentication
Job Accounting/Authentication
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentic.] Configures settings related to machine management. Overview of User Login Administration (page 520) Overview of Job Accounting (page 555) Unknown User Settings (page 577)
500
System Menu > Add/Delete Application
Add/Delete Application
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Add/Delete Application] Configure the application settings.
Item [Application]
[Optional Function]
Description
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.*1
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. Overview of the Applications (page 803)
*1 There are currently no application available for this machine.
501
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Image Adjustment
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Image Adjustment]
[Density Adjustment]
Make the overall density darker or lighter.
[Copy]
Item
[Send/Box]
[Fax]
Description
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. FAX Operation Guide
502
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Clarify Text (Noise Removal) Settings]
Adjust the legibility of characters.
Item [Clarify Text Level] [Noise Removal Level]
Description
Value: [1 (Low)], [2 (Normal)], [3 (High)] Value Off On: [1 (Low)], [2 (Normal)], [3 (High)]
503
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Background Density Adj.]
Make the overall background darker or lighter.
Item [Copy (Auto)]
[Send/Box (Auto)]
Description
Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
504
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Sharpness Adjustment]
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
[Copy]
Item
[Send/Box]
Description
Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending or storing them in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels. Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
505
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Contrast]
Make the overall contrast higher or lower.
[Copy]
Item
[Send/Box]
Description
Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies. Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document box. Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
506
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Toner Save Level (EcoPrint)]
[Copy]
Item
[Printer]
Description
Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint). Value: 1 to 5 Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls. Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint). Value: 1 to 5 Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
507
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Auto Color Correction]
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white. Value: 1 (color), 2,3,4,5 (black and white)
508
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Correcting Black Line]
Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when the document processor is used. Value: [Off], [On (Low)], [On (High)]
509
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Color Registration - Auto]
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Color Registration Procedure (page 784)
510
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Color Registration - Manual]
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. If standard registration does not resolve the problem or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed registration. See Detailed Registration in the link below. Color Registration Procedure (page 784)
511
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Image Adjustment]
Item [Drum Refresh] [Developer Refresh] [Laser Scanner Cleaning] [Calibration]
Description Value: [Not Execute], [Execute] Value: [Not Execute], [Execute] Value: [Not Execute], [Execute] Value: [Not Execute], [Execute]
512
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
Others
[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others"
[Altitude Adjustment]
Item [Altitude Adjustment]
Description
Value: [Normal], [1001 - 2000m], [2001 - 3000m], [3001 - 3500m]
513
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[MC]
[MC]
Item
Value: [1] to [7]
Description
514
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Diagnostics]
[Software Verification]
[Expected] [Result Value] [Start Verification]
Item
Display Value. Display Value. Run Verification.
Description
515
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Test Page]
Output the test page for identifying the cause of the image defects.
[Test Page]
Item
Description Value: [Cancel], [Print]
516
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Restart/Initialization]
Item [Restart Network] [Restart Entire Device] [Format SD Card]
Description
Restart the network (page 486)
Others (page 488)
Format the SD card. To use an SD card, it is necessary to format the SD card on this machine first. When the formatting is complete, data can be written to the SD card. Value: [Cancel], [Format]
517
System Menu > Adjustment/Maintenance
[Service Settings]
Perform the maintenance and inspection of the machine. This menu is primarily used by service personnel for maintenance work.
518
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
Overview of User Login Administration................................................................................520 Enable User Login Administration.........................................................................................522 Setting User Login Administration ........................................................................................523 Overview of Job Accounting ...................................................................................................555 Enabling Job Accounting.........................................................................................................557 Job Accounting (Local).............................................................................................................558 Configuring Job Accounting ...................................................................................................568
519
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user name and password for user authentication to login. 1 Enable User Login Administration
Enable User Login Administration (page 522) 2 Set the user
Setting User Login Administration (page 523) 3 Enter the login user name and password and execute the job
Login (page 74)
Managing the Job Account from PC
In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs
Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs. Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC (page 531)
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning. Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 533)
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning. Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 534)
520
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC. Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 535) The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
521
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enable User Login Administration
Enable User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item
Description
[Local Authentication] [Network Authentication]
User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [User Login] from "User Login Setting".
2 Configure the settings. · Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication]. · Select [Off] to disable user login administration. · If [Local Authentication] is selected, set [Local Authorization]. Local Authorization (page 536) · If [Network Authentication] is selected, set "Server Settings". Server Settings (page 537)
NOTE If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings.
522
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration
This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting
You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication Security" [User Account Lockout Settings]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Configure the settings. Configurable items are as follows: [Lockout] Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled. Value: Off, On [Lockout Policy] Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is applied. Value Number of Retries until Locked: Specify how many login retries are allowed until the account is locked out. (1 to 10 times) Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked. (1 to 60 minutes) Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. You can select either [Remote Login Only] or [All]. Remote Login Only locks out all operations from outside the operation panel. [Locked out Users List] Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].
NOTE This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
523
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Password Policy Settings
You can prohibit the setting and use of passwords that do not comply with the password policy. Setting the Password Policy makes it more difficult to break the password.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] > "Authentication Security" [Password Policy Settings]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Configure the settings. Configurable items are as follows: [Password Policy] Select whether or not password policy is enabled. Value: Off, On [Minimum Password Length] Set the minimum password length of characters for password. Value: Off, On (1 to 64 characters) [Password Complexity] Set the password complexity. Value [Reject common PW and 3 consecutive same chars]: Off, On [At least one uppercase letter (A-Z)]: Off, On [At least one lowercase letter (a-z)]: Off, On [At least one number (0 - 9)]: Off, On [At least one symbol]: Off, On [Maximum Password Age] Set the maximum password age. Value: Off, On (1 to 180 days) [Policy Violated User List] List of users who do not meet password policy requirements.
524
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Adding a User (Local User List)
You can add up to 1000 users (including the default login user name).
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Add/Edit Local User].
2 Enter the user information. Select [Add], then enter the information on each item. User Name*1 Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). Login User Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be registered. Login Password*1 Enter the password to login (up to 256 characters). [Access Level Settings]*1 Configure user privilege. Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for user access privileges. System Administration Permissions If the user privileges level set in Access Level is [User], select the items for which the user has setting privileges from the following: · Original/Paper Settings · Address Book · User/Job Account Information · Basic Network Settings · Basic Device Settings · Advanced Device/Network Settings [Account Name] Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID. Overview of Job Accounting (page 555)
525
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
NOTE · Search by account ID or account name. Select either [Search (ID)] or [Search(Kana)] to switch
between [Search (ID)] and [Search(Kana)]. · Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.
Email Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. Register if you wish to use E-mail sending. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
[ID Card Info] Register ID card information. Place the ID card on the ID card reader.
NOTE This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is activated. Card Authentication Kit(B) AC <IC card authentication kit (Activate)> (page 802)
Local Authorization*2 Set usage authority for each user. Print Restriction Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Print Restriction (Color) Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Copy Restriction Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited. Copy Restriction (Full Color) Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited. Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed. Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed. EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
526
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration Send Restriction Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited. Fax TX Restriction Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Storing Restriction in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes. Storing Restriction in USB Set whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive. [My Panel] You can register the language selection and initial screen. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.
*1 Be sure to enter the items. *2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled. Local Authorization (page 536)
NOTE · For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 805)
3 Select [Register]. A new user is added on the local user list.
NOTE If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select [Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen. For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following: Simple Login Settings (page 547)
527
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Changing User Properties
Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Add/Edit Local User].
2 Change the user properties.
1 Select (information icon) for the user whose properties you wish to change.
NOTE · Select [User Name] or [Login User Name] to sort the user list. · Search by name or login user name. Select either [Search(Login)] or [Search(Name)] to switch
between[Search(Login)] and [Search(Name)].
2 Check the settings and change or add information as needed. · User Name · Login User Name*1 · [Domain Name]*3 · Login Password · [Access Level Settings]*1 · [Account Name]*1 · Email Address · [ID Card Info]*1 · Local Authorization*1*2 · [My Panel] *1 You can change only when you log in with machine administrator authority. *2 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled. Local Authorization (page 536) For details on each item, refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525) *3 If the user is a network user with local user privileges, the Domain Name is displayed. Configure Network User Rights (page 538)
528
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration 3 Select [Save]. The user information is changed.
529
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Deleting a User
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Add/Edit Local User].
2 Deleting a user.
1 Select the user to delete. 2 [Menu] > [Delete] > [Delete]
The selected user will be deleted. NOTE
The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted. Administrator Privileges Overview (page 122)
530
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Print on This Machine from a PC
To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [Devices and Printers].
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Control Panel]
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration. [Use specific name] This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each print job. [Prompt for name] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
531
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration [Prompt for name and validate] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the "Login user names list" needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is attempted. [Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name] When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name and password will appear.
3 Click [OK]. NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
532
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN
The following TWAIN driver settings are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Click the search box in the taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting". Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. Displays the TWAIN Driver Settings screen.
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Click [User Authentication Settings]. 2 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3 Click [OK].
533
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA
The following WIA driver settings are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears. NOTE For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User Name and Password.
2 Click [OK].
534
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC
To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Start] button in Windows, select [Windows System Tools], [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [Devices and Printers].
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Control Panel]
2 Right-click the FAX driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printing preferences] menu of the FAX driver.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] tab.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the User Login Administration. [Use Specific Login User Name] This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job. [Prompt for Login User Name] A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
535
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Local Authorization
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization. NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication]. Enable User Login Administration (page 522)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Local Authorization].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Off] or [On].
536
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Server Settings
Set the server type when network authentication is enabled.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [User Login] > [Network Authentication].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the "Server Type" and enter the host name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. When selecting [Ext.]. as the server type, enter the port number.
NOTE · Selecting [Add/Edit/Delete Domain] displays the domain registration list. In the domain
registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain names can be registered. · If two or more domains are registered, select [Default Domain] and select the default domain.
2 Select [OK].
NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings. · Network Authentication setting of the machine · User property of the Authentication Server · Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
537
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configure Network User Rights
Select whether or not to grant local user rights to network users. If this setting is applied, when a network user logs in, the logged in network user's information is registered as a local user. By setting the account name on the registered local user information, network users can coordinate with job accounting. Displays the "Domain Name" in the user information for local users with rights.
NOTE For local user information, refer to the following: Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Network User Authority] from "User Login Setting".
2 Configure the settings. Enable "Give Local User Authority" to configure the settings. "User Full Action" Configure the action when the number of users is exceeded when granting local user rights. Value: [Do Not Add New User], [Delete Old User] "Authority When Offline" Set the expiration date for local user rights that have been granted and that do not require network authentication. Value: [Always Enabled], [Specify Enabled Period] (up to 180 days) [Local Authorization Defaults] Set the default local user rights that are granted.
538
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group Authorization Settings
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server. NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in "User Login Setting". In addition, set "LDAP" to ON in "Protocol Settings". Enable User Login Administration (page 522) Protocol Settings (page 475)
Group Authorization
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Group Authorization].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Off] or [On].
539
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Group List (Up to 20)
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Other users and groups belong to "Others".
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Group Authorization].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Menu] > [Add] > , then configure each item. Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters). Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295). Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges. Print Restriction Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Print Restriction (Color) Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Copy Restriction Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited. Copy Restriction (Full Color) Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited. Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed. Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
540
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed. Send Restriction Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited. Fax TX Restriction Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Storing Restriction in USB Set whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive. *1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
3 Register the group.
1 Select [Save]. A new group is added on the group list.
541
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Guest Authorization Settings
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are allowed to use.
NOTE To use Guest Authorization, [User Login] must be enabled. Enable User Login Administration (page 522)
Enabling Guest Authorization
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Guest Authorization Set.].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Off] or [On]. NOTE
· If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Logout] must be selected when logging in. · In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use a
different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the guest properties.
542
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Configuring Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Guest Property].
2 Configure the settings. Check the settings and change or add information as needed. User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). The default setting is "Guest User". Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed. [Account Name] Add an account where the user belongs. If the user does not belong to any account, select [Others]. Authorization Rules Set usage authority for each user. The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows. Print Restriction Select whether or not to prohibit use of print functions for the printer. Print from USB Drive is an applicable print function. Print Restriction (Color) Select whether or not to prohibit use of the print function (color) of the printer. Print from USB Drive is an applicable print function. Copy Restriction Select whether or not to prohibit use of copy print functions. Copy Restriction (Full Color) Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited. Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed. Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed. EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed. 543
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions. Fax TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. Storing Restriction in USB Set whether or not to reject usage of storing in the USB drive.
3 Register the user.
1 Select [OK].
544
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of E-mail.
NOTE To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the user authentication method in "User Login Setting". In addition, set [LDAP] to On in "Protocol Settings". Enable User Login Administration (page 522) Protocol Settings (page 475)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Obtain NW User Property] from "User Login Setting".
2 Configure the settings.
1 Enable "Obtain NW User Property" to configure the settings. LDAP Server Information Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server name is not entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication. Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389. Acquisition of User Information Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters). Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters). Email Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 256 characters).
545
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration Authentication Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the power off and then on. Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds). LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off], [TLS] or [STARTTLS]. *1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the network authentication. * 2 For Active Directory on Windows, typically use the displayName attribute. *3. "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign "displayName" in "Name 1" and "department" in "Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales". *4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address. *5. This function is displayed when "Server Type" is set to [Kerberos] in "Network Authentication".
3 Select [OK].
546
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Simple Login Settings
The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to use this functionality.
NOTE · For user registration, refer to the following:
Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525) · To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled.
Enable User Login Administration (page 522) · When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
Enabling Simple Login
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Simple Login].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Off] or [On].
547
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Simple Login Key
Register users to use simple login. You can add up to 20 users.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Simple Login Key].
2 Enter the user information.
1 Select the key to which you want to register a user. 2 Enter the user name to be displayed.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805)
3 Select [Select user]. 4 To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users, select [Network
User]. The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected. 5 (When specifying the user from [Local User]) Select the user to be set for simple login.
NOTE · Search by name or login user name. Select either [Search(Login)] or [Search(Name)] to switch
between[Search(Login)] and [Search(Name)]. · Select [User Name] or [Login User Name] to sort the user list.
548
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration 6 (When specifying the user from [Network User]) Select the entry field for "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the information of the user to be registered, and select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the "Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.
NOTE For details on entering characters, refer to the following: Character Entry Method (page 805) 7 Select [Password] Off or On. 8 Select the user icon to be displayed.
3 Register the user.
1 Select [Save].
549
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type. NOTE
This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated. Card Authentication Kit(B) AC <IC card authentication kit (Activate)> (page 802)
Keyboard Login
When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by keyboard is allowed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Keyboard Login].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Prohibit] or [Permit].
550
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Additional Authentication
Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID card. NOTE
This function is not displayed when "Server Type" from "Network Authentication" is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos].
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Additional Authentication].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Off], [Use Password], or [Use PIN]. NOTE
[Use PIN] is displayed only when using PIN Code Authorization. PIN Login (page 553)
551
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Quick Job Printing
Displays a list of print jobs saved to the Stored Job Box when logging in with an IC card via user login. NOTE
For details on Simple Job Printing, refer to the following: Simple Job Printing (page 214)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Quick Job Printing].
2 Configure the settings. Enable "Display List on Login" to configure the settings. Logout after Printing Select whether or not to automatically log out after printing. Skip PIN and Copies Confirmation Select whether or not to skip entering the PIN code and confirming the number of copies when printing when a PIN code is set.
552
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
PIN Login
NOTE When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for server type. Enable User Login Administration (page 522) Server Settings (page 537)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [PIN Login] from "User Login Setting".
2 Configure the function.
1 Select [Off] or [On]
553
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following: Login (page 74)
Logout
When the operation is complete, select the [Logout] key. You will return to the login user name/login password entry screen.
554
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Overview of Job Accounting
Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. 1 Enable job accounting
Enabling Job Accounting (page 557) 2 Setting an account.
Job Accounting (Local) (page 558) 3 Enter the assigned account ID when performing the job.
Login (page 573) 4 Count the number of pages printed.
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the printer driver on the PC. 1 Set Job Accounting for the PC on the network by using the printer driver.
Job Accounting for Printing (page 563) 2 Execute printing. 3 Count the number of pages printed.
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN
To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer connected to the machine. Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 565)
555
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA
To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer connected to the machine. Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 566)
Managing the FAX Jobs Transmitted from a PC
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver on the PC. Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 567) The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
556
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Job Accounting].
2 Configure the settings. Select [Local] or [Network]. Select [Off] to disable job accounting. NOTE When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
557
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting (Local)
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account
Up to 100 individual accounts can be added.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Add/Edit Job Accounting].
2 Enter the account information.
1 Select [Menu] > [Add], then configure each item. Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999). Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 559)
NOTE · For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (page 805) · Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
2 Select [Register]. A new account is added on the Account List.
558
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Printer Count".
Copier/Printer Count (page 576)
Restriction Items
When "Copy/Printer Count" is "Individual"
Item Copy Restriction (Total) Copy Restriction (Full Color) Print Restriction (Total)
Print Restriction (Full Color)
Scan Restriction (Others) Fax TX Restriction
Description
Limits the number of sheets used for copying. Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying. Limits the number of sheets used for printing. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
When "Copy/Printer Count" is "Total"
Item Print Restriction (Total) Print Restriction (Full Color)
Scan Restriction (Others) Fax TX Restriction
Description
Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing and color printing. Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
[Off]
Item
No restriction is applied.
Description
559
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Item [Counter Limit]
[Reject Usage]
Description
Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Restriction is applied.
560
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Editing an Account
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Add/Edit Job Accounting].
2 Edit an account.
1 Select (information icon) for the account name you wish to edit. NOTE
· Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list. 2 Change the account information. 3 Select [Register].
The account information is changed.
561
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Deleting an Account
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Add/Edit Job Accounting].
2 Deleting
1 Select the account name you wish to delete. NOTE
· Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list. 2 [Menu] > [Delete] > [Yes]
The account is deleted.
562
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for Printing
To manage the number of pages used for jobs to be printed from the PC, you need to configure the following settings by using the printer driver. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Start] button in Windows, select [Windows System], [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [Devices and Printers].
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Control Panel]
2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting. [Use Specific Account ID] Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each print job. [Prompt for account ID] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted. [Prompt for account ID and validate] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
NOTE This is enabled only if Account IDs are added.
563
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local) [Display account ID list] The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID to be used needs to be selected from the list. NOTE This is enabled only if Account IDs are added. [Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID] When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will appear. NOTE This is enabled only if Account IDs are added.
3 Click [OK]. NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following: Printer Driver User Guide
564
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Click Search box in the taskbar, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting". Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list. Displays the TWAIN Driver Settings screen.
2 Select the machine, and click [Edit].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Click [User Authentication Settings]. 2 Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3 Click [OK].
565
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears. NOTE For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [All apps] [Windows Tools] [Control Panel]. Enter "Scanner" into the search field on the control panel. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2 Click [OK].
566
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 10.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Start] button in Windows, select [Windows System Tools], [Control Panel] [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For Windows 11, select the [Start] button [Devices and Printers].
[All apps]
[Windows Tools]
[Control Panel]
2 Right-click the FAX driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printing preferences] menu of the printer driver.
3 Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] tab.
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
2 Set the Job Accounting. [Use Specific Account ID] This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the same Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each FAX job. [Prompt for Account ID] A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
3 Click [OK].
567
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Configuring Job Accounting
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999. The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for [Copy/Printer Count]. Copier/Printer Count (page 576)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Job Accounting Setting].
2 Configure the settings.
1 Select the item for "Default Counter Limit" > use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets > [OK] When [Copy/Printer Count] is set to [Individual] [Copy Restriction (Total)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying. [Copy Restriction (Full Color)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying. [Print Restriction (Total)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC [Print Restriction (Full Color)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from USB Drive · Print Report · Print from PC [Scan Restriction (Others)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
568
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting [Fax TX Restriction] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines. When [Copy/Printer Count] is set to [Total] [Print Restriction (Total)] Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. [Print Restriction (Full Color)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing. [Scan Restriction (Others)] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). [Fax TX Restriction] Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This item is displayed for fax-compatible machines.
569
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
The items that can be referenced are as follows:
Item [Printed Pages]
[Scanned Pages] Fax Transmission Pages Fax Transmission Time [Counter Reset]
Description
Displays the number of pages used in printing for each of the following item.
Count by Function Displays the number of pages used to copy, print, FAX and their total, for each color mode.
Count by Duplex
The number of pages used for black and white printing is displayed.
Count by Combine Displays the number of pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2 in 1) mode, Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing, printing and other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned. Displays the number of pages faxed. Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions. Resets the counter. Select [Reset] on the confirmation screen.
Counting the Number of Pages for All Accounts
This counts the number of pages for each account. In addition, you can reset the counts for all accounts at the same time.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select [Job Accounting Counter].
2 Check the number of pages.
1 Select [Menu] > [Total] to check the count. Select [Counter Reset] to reset the counter.
2 Confirm the count and select [Close].
570
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages for Each Account
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Job Accounting Counter].
2 Check the number of pages.
1 Select the account. NOTE
· Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list. · To display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account]. 2 Check the count. Select [...] > [Counter Reset] to reset the counter. 3 Confirm the count and select [Close].
571
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
1 Prepare paper. Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
2 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
3 Print.
1 Select [Print Accounting Report] > [Print] Accounting report is printed. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. If count by paper size is being performed, then the report will be printed per size.
572
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Using Job Accounting
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
1 Enter the account ID using the numeric keys > [Login]
NOTE · If you entered a wrong character, select [C] (Clear) and enter the account ID again. · If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and login will
fail. Enter the correct account ID. · By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of
pages scanned. If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears instead of the screen to enter the account ID. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. Adding a User (Local User List) (page 525)
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
573
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Logout
1 When the operation is complete, select the [Logout]key. Return to the Enter Account ID screen.
574
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Apply Limit
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The action is as follows:
Item [Immediately]
[Subsequently] [Alert Only]
Description
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. If sending or storing in the box is already underway, prohibition will become effective from the next job.
The print or scan job currently underway will continue but the subsequent job will be rejected.
Job continues while displaying an alert message.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 [Job Accounting Setting] > [Apply Limit]
2 Configure the function.
1 Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only].
575
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Copier/Printer Count
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. For details, refer to the following: Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 559) Counting the Number of Pages Printed (page 570) Print Accounting Report (page 572)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select [Job Accounting Setting] > [Printer Count]
2 Configure the function.
1 Select [Total] or [Individual].
576
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Unknown User Settings
Unknown ID Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
NOTE This function is available when Authentication is enabled.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication] NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator. 2 Select "Unknown User Settings" [Unknown ID Job].
2 Configure the settings. Select [Reject] or [Permit]. [Permit] The job is permitted to be printed. [Reject] The job is rejected (not printed).
577
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting
Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown
If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.
NOTE This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit]. Unknown ID Job (page 577)
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Job Accounting/Authentication]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select "Unknown User Settings" [User Property].
2 Enter the user information.
1 Add information on each item > [Save] User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). [Account Name] Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown. Overview of Job Accounting (page 555)
NOTE · Select [Account Name] or [Account ID] to sort the account list.
Authorization Rules Set usage authority. The following restriction items are available: Print Restriction Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from PC Print Restriction (Color) Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited. Applicable print functions are as follows: · Print from PC
578
Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
Regular Maintenance..............................................................................................................580 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................588 Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 783 Clearing Paper Jams ................................................................................................................789
579
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
580
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Platen
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
581
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Slit Glass
When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth. IMPORTANT
Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning. NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
582
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Cleaning Paper Transfer Unit
The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container is replaced. To maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month as well as when the toner container is replaced. Print problems such as soiling of the reverse side of printed pages may occur if the paper transfer unit becomes dirty.
CAUTION
Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
Wipe away the paper dust on paper 1 and dirt on paper 2 using a soft, dry cloth. IMPORTANT
Be careful not to touch the part during cleaning. It may deteriorate the print quality.
583
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Container
When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed. Replace the toner container.
"Toner[C][M][Y][K] is empty."
When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for replacement.
"Toner [C][M][Y][K] is low. (Replace when empty.)"
The number of sheets that can be printed with one toner container depends on the print data (how much toner is used). Compliant with JIS X 6932 (ISO/IEC 19798), when the EcoPrint mode is turned [Off], the average number of printable sheets of the toner container is as follows: (When printing with A4.)
Toner Color Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
4,100 images 3,200 images 3,200 images 3,200 images
Life of the Toner Container (Printable pages)
NOTE
· The average number of printable sheets of the toner container that comes with this machine is as follows:
· All colors: 1,500 images
· For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may cause image defects and product failure.
· The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the procedures for the yellow toner container, as an example.
584
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
1 Open the right cover.
2 Unlock the toner container. 3 Remove the toner container. 4 Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.
585
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
5 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the points shown below.
6 Shake the toner container.
586
Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance
7 Install the toner container.
IMPORTANT Insert the toner container all the way.
8 Close the right cover.
NOTE · If the right cover not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly. · Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
587
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If the problem persists, contact your service representative.
NOTE When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following: Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 2)
588
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Machine Operation Trouble
The application does not start up
Is the auto panel reset setting time set too short? Check the set time for auto panel reset.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Energy Saver/Timer] > [Panel Reset Timer]
2 Set the panel reset time to 30 seconds or more It can be set in the range of 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments).
589
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The screen does not respond when the power switch is turned on
Is the machine plugged in?
1 Plug in the power cord that comes with this machine to an outlet. Make sure the power plug is securely plugged in.
590
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Machine does not print even when [Start] is pressed
Is there a message displayed on the screen? If a message is displayed on the screen, you may not be able to operate it depending on what is displayed. Determine the appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly. Is the machine in Sleep mode? Operation can't be done when it is in sleep mode.
1 Press any key on the control panel
NOTE It is possible to return from sleep mode by touching the touch panel.
591
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Blank sheets are ejected
Are the originals loaded correctly? Placing Originals on the Platen
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flat against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point. NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Size (page 313)
592
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Placing Originals in the Document Processor
1 Adjust the original width guides.
2 Place the original.
1 Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.
NOTE For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following: Original Orientation (page 319)
IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam.
593
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed on the right side (so that they will be scanned last).
Is the application software set correctly? Check the settings of the application software.
594
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Paper often jams
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
595
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
2 Adjust the paper length guides to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. (Cassette 1 only)
NOTE It is necessary to set the paper size from the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
596
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
597
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE When Folio, Oficio II or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
5 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
6 Configure the function Select the paper size and paper type. [Cassette 1 Settings] to [Cassette 2 Settings] (page 413) [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
598
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
599
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting · If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
Is there a problem with the paper? Remove the paper from the multipurpose tray once and change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
600
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition? Remove the paper from the cassette, turn it over, and then reload it. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine? Remove the jammed paper. Clearing Paper Jams (page 789)
601
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Two or more sheets are overlaps when ejected (multi feeding)
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
602
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
2 Adjust the paper length guides to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. (Cassette 1 only)
NOTE It is necessary to set the paper size from the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
603
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
604
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE When Folio, Oficio II or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
5 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] > [Device Settings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
6 Configure the function Select the paper size and paper type. [Cassette 1 Settings] to [Cassette 2 Settings] (page 413) [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
605
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
606
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting · If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
IMPORTANT · Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
607
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printouts are wrinkled
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
608
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Adjust the cassette size.
1 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
2 Adjust the paper length guides to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. (Cassette 1 only)
NOTE It is necessary to set the paper size from the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
609
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
610
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE When Folio, Oficio II or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
611
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray. · If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits. When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
612
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting IMPORTANT
· Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
Remove the paper from the cassette once and change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
613
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printouts are curled
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. When loading paper in a cassette
1 Pull the Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.
NOTE When pulling the cassette out of the machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
2 Adjust the cassette size.
614
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting 1 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette. Press the paper width adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required. Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
2 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required. Press the paper length adjusting tab and slide the guides to the paper size required.
NOTE It is necessary to set the paper size from the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
615
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
1 Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to avoid paper jams or skewed printing. 2 Load the paper in the cassette.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
616
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Gently push the Cassette 1 back in.
NOTE When Folio, Oficio II or Legal is used, the cassette will extend out from the machine.
When loading paper in the multipurpose tray
1 Open the multipurpose tray.
2 Adjust the multipurpose tray size. Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.
617
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops. After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multipurpose tray. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147)
IMPORTANT · When loading the paper, keep the print side facing up. · Curled paper must be uncurled before use. · When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray
from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray. · If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits. When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multipurpose tray, load the paper with the print side facing up. For the procedure for printing, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide. Printer Driver User Guide Example: When printing the address.
618
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting IMPORTANT
· Use unfolded Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard). · How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following: [MP Tray Settings] (page 414)
4 Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using the operation panel. Specifying Paper Size and Media Type (page 156)
Remove the paper from the cassette once and reload the paper upside-down or change the loading direction by rotating the paper 180 degrees. Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
619
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printer driver cannot be installed
Is the driver installed with the host name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct function is available? Specify the IP address instead of the host name. Installing Software (page 100) Is Level 3 selected in Security Quick Setup?
1 Acquire a root certificate for SSL communication from a trusted root certification authority. In Command Center RX, click [Security Settings] > [Certificates], and register the root certificate in [Root Certificate 1] to [Root Certificate 5].
2 After installing the certificate, restart the PC. 3 In Command Center RX, click [Network Settings] > [Protocols], and in [Other
Protocols], set "SNMPv3" to [On].
4 In Command Center RX, click [Management Settings] > [SNMP], and set "SNMPv3". 5 Access the [Control Panel], then select [Devices and Printers], [Add a printer], and
[The printer that I want isn't listed].
6 Check [Select a shared printer by name], and enter the address of the printer. E.g.: https://hostname:443/printers/lp1
7 Select the desired printer and specify the printer driver.
620
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot start printing
Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Is the power turned on? Turn the power switch on.
1 Turn the power switch on.
IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch. Are the USB cable and network cable connected? Make sure to connect the USB cable and network cable securely.
621
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Connect the network cable
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 57)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network. Network Setup (page 78)
622
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Connect a USB cable to the machine.
IMPORTANT If the power is on, turn the power switch off. Power off (page 57)
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
2 Power on the machine.
Is the print job paused? Resume printing.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2 Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen. Printing is paused. When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Pause All Print Jobs] .
Are there a mixture of inaccessible addresses? If you have configured wired and Wi-Fi networks with name resolution, you may have a mix of IP addresses (private addresses) on the other inaccessible network.
623
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting IMPORTANT
Only one host name and one domain name can be used on this machine. Please consider this limitation when setting the network operation.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Others" > [Primary Network (Client)] Select Wi-Fi, Wired or Optional Network as the network to use without restrictions. Others (page 488)
2 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings] Please [Enable] either [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi] and [Disable] the other. Protocol Settings (page 475)
3 In Command Center RX, change the settings for name resolution of NetBEUI, DNS, etc., or change the network environment settings. Command Center RX User Guide
624
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot print with USB drive / Does not recognize USB drive
Is the USB drive connected to the machine firmly? Connect the USB drive firmly to the machine. Are USB host settings set to [Block]?
1 Change the USB host setting to [Unblock] [System Menu/Counter] key > [SecuritySettings] > "Interface Block Setting" Interface Block Setting (page 491) Is the USB drive broken? Use another USB drive.
625
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
While [Auto-IP] is already set to [On], the IP address is not assigned automatically
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered for the link local address of TCP/IP(v4)?
1 Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address of TCP/IP(v4).
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Wired Network Settings] > "TCP/IP Settings" [IPv4 Settings]
2 Enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address. TCP/IP (IPv4) setting (page 78)
626
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot send via SMB
Is the network cable connected? Connect the cable to the Machine and HUB securely.
1 Connect the cable to the machine.
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2 Power on the machine and configure the network. Network Setup (page 78)
Are the network settings on the machine configured correctly? Check that TCP/IP is [On], and IPv4 or IPv6 is configured in accordance with the usage environment. TCP/IP Settings (page 470)
Are the SMB protocol and SMB settings for folder sending turned on?
1 Set the SMB protocol settings to On. [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings] > [SMB Client (Transmission)] > ON
2 Set the SMB settings for folder sending to [On]. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Sending Job - Folder] > [SMB Settings] > ON
Are the host name, folder path, login user name, and login password of the destination computer correct?
1 [Home] key > [Send]
627
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 In the destination screen for sending, select [Enter destination] > [SMB] 3 Enter the destination information
To directly specify the SMB folder, select [Folder Path Entry] and enter each item.
NOTE
When selecting On for "Entry Check for New Dest.", the re-entering screen for the destination information appears. Re-entering the New Destination (page 290)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Setting
Detail
Host Name Port Folder Path Login User Name
Login Password
Computer name. Enter "Host Name" or "IP Address". To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ]. Limited character count: 256 characters or less Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10] (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10])
Port number If the port number is not specified, the default port number is 445.
Share name Limited character count: 260 characters or less For example: scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder: share name\folder name in shared folder
· If the computer name and domain name are the same User Name For example: james.smith.
· If the computer name and domain name are different Domain name\User name For example: abcdnet\james.smith
Limited character count: 64 characters or less If the computer name and domain name are different because "\" is not available, use @ to enter the user name in the following format: User name@Domain name (Example: james.smith@abcdnet)
Login password. Limited character count: 128 characters or less Upper case and lowercase letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
You can search for a folder on a PC on the network. Select [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]. Select the folder from the Search Results list.
628
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
NOTE · If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a
destination. · If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can search for a destination from among PCs that
are connected to the network by entering "Domain/Workgroup Name"/"Host Name". · A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to
specify in the screen that appears, and select [OK]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears. · After you enter the login user name and login password of the destination PC, the shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [OK]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
Are the folder sharing settings configured correctly? Check the sharing settings and access permissions in the folder properties.
1 Right-click the shared folder and click [Properties] [Security] tab. 2 Select a user and make sure the user you entered in the group name or user name
field is displayed
3 Make sure that [Allow] is checked off for "Modify" and "Read & Execute" 4 Click the [Close] button.
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 161)
Is the selected interface selected as the Primary Network? Make sure the selected interface is selected as the Primary Network.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Others" [Primary Network (Client)]
NOTE [Primary Network (Client)] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-37/IB-38/IB-51) is installed.
2 Specify the host name or IP address of the interface selected as the Primary Network, or reconfigure it to the interface you want to use. For example, if you selected the [Optional Network]optional network as the Primary Network, specify the host name or IP address of IB-50 or IB-51.
629
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Are the exception settings for Windows Firewall configured correctly?
Make sure that the exception settings for Windows Firewall are configures correctly.
1 Select the Windows [Start] button [Windows System] [Control Panel] and Security] [Allow an app through Windows Firewall].
[System
2 Make sure [File and Printer Sharing] is checked off
3 Go back to the [System and Security] screen and select [Check Firewall Status] of Windows Defender Firewall
4 Click [Advanced Setting] [Inbound Rules]
5 Confirm that the registered exception settings (rules) are displayed in the list. Configuring Windows Firewall (page 166)
Are the time settings of the machine, domain server, and data destination PC all synchronized? Synchronize the time settings of the machine domain server, and the data destination PC.
Is "Send error." displayed on the screen? For details, refer to the following: "Send error." is displayed (page 703)
630
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot send via email
Is the email send size limited in the SMTP server registered in this machine? Check email sending size in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] of the [Functions] Menu. 5 Check whether a restriction value is entered in [E-mail Size Limit] of "E-mail Send
Settings", and change it as necessary.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
631
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The machine is emitting steam in the area around the paper ejection slot
Is the temperature in the room where the machine is running low? Or was damp paper used? Depending on the machine's printing environment and the condition of the paper, the moist contained in the paper may evaporate due to the heat generated during printing, and the water vapor emitted may look like smoke. There is no problem, and you can continue printing. If the steam concerns you, raise the room temperature or replace the paper with a new dryer paper.
632
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Even after replacing the toner container, the message to replace the toner container does not disappear
Corrective Actions Make sure the right cover and rear cover are closed.
633
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Cannot find the machine with WSD
Are you searching for this machine by specifying the IP address or host name? For security reasons, [HTTP] protocol is set to off, and therefore you cannot search by IP address or host name.
634
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed Image Trouble
Printouts are totally too light
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
Is the media type set correctly? Check if the media type setting is correct.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Paper Feeding] > [Media Type Setting]
2 Check the weight (paper thickness) for the paper type and change it to the correct value. [Media Type Setting] (page 417)
Are you changing the density? Set to an appropriate density.
1 Set the density in the range [-4] to [4] Density (page 322) NOTE You can configure the density settings using [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" > [Density Adjustment]. Image Adjustment (page 502)
Have you set EcoPrint? Set [EcoPrint] to [Off].
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Printer] 2 [EcoPrint] > Off
635
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Calibration needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the calibration.
1 Perform the calibration. Calibration begins.
Developer refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Developer Refresh
1 Perform the Developer Refresh. Developer Refresh begins. NOTE Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
Laser scanner cleaning needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the laser scanner cleaning.
1 Perform the Laser Scanner Cleaning. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
636
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
White background parts of the image appear to have a slight overall coloration
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level.
1 Set the density in the range [-4] to [4] Density (page 322)
NOTE Density can also be set from [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" > [Image Adjustment]. Image Adjustment (page 502)
Calibration needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the calibration.
1 Perform the calibration. Calibration begins.
Developer refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Developer Refresh
1 Perform the Developer Refresh. Developer Refresh begins.
NOTE Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
637
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" > [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 Perform the Drum Refresh. Drum Refresh begins.
638
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly)
Is it an original with a photo printed on it? Check the content structure of the original and change it to an appropriate image quality.
1 Select a [Original Image] for each function 2 Select [Photo].
Original Image (page 323)
639
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Texts are not clearly printed
Have you selected appropriate image quality for the original? Check the content structure of the original and change it to an appropriate image quality.
1 Select a [Original Image] for each function 2 Select the image quality that matches the type of the original
Original Image (page 323)
640
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Black or color dots appear on the white background
Is the original holder or the platen dirty? Wipe the inside of the document processor and the platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Developer refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Developer Refresh
1 Perform the Developer Refresh. Developer Refresh begins. NOTE Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
641
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images are fuzzy or cut off
Are you using the machine in a place with high humidity or drastic temperature and humidity fluctuations? Use the machine in an environment with appropriate humidity. Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" > [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 Perform the Drum Refresh. Drum Refresh begins.
642
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images are shifted
Is the original set correctly? · When setting the original on the platen, make sure to align the original with the original size indicator plate.
Placing Originals on the Platen (page 237) · When loading the original in the document processor, make sure to align the original width guides before
loading the original. Loading Originals in the Document Processor (page 239) Is the paper loaded correctly? Adjust the paper length guide and width guide of the cassette to fit the paper size. Loading in the Cassettes (page 149)
643
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The altitude is 1000 m or higher and irregular horizontal white lines appear in the image.
1 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others"[Altitude Adjustment] ,and set to an elevation one level higher than the current setting.
644
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The altitude is 1000 m or higher and dots appear in the image.
1 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others"[Altitude Adjustment] ,and set to an elevation one level higher than the current setting.
645
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Printed images have vertical lines
Is the slit glass dirty? When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.
IMPORTANT Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
Laser scanner cleaning needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the laser scanner cleaning.
1 Perform the Laser Scanner Cleaning. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
646
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Dirt on the top edge or back of the paper
Is the inside of the machine dirty? Open the Rear Cover 1, and if the inside of the Machine is dirty with toner or the like, wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
647
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Part of the image is periodically faint or shows white lines
Is the Rear Cover 1 tightly closed? Open the Rear Cover 1 and close it again.
Drum refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" > [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Drum Refresh.
1 Perform the Drum Refresh. Drum Refresh begins.
Developer refresh needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the Developer Refresh
1 Perform the Developer Refresh. Developer Refresh begins. NOTE Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
648
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The print on the back page bleeds through
1 Select [Prevent Bleed-thru] from the [Color/ImageQuality] tab and set it to On.
NOTE Prevent Bleed-thru can also be set from [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Function Defaults] > [Copy/Print] > [Prevent Bleed-through (Copy)].
649
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
A lighter version of the previous image remains and is repeatedly printed
1 If white dots appear in the improved image, decrease the value by one level. 2 If the white background of the improved image appears colored, proceed to the
next step. If there is no unnecessary coloring, finish editing.
3 Configure the settings for MC.
1 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Others" > [MC]. Increase the value one level from the current value.
2 Select the [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]. Perform only calibration.
3 Print the document and confirm the image quality. Increase the value until the image is improved. NOTE If there is still no improvement, return the setting to the original value.
4 If white dots or color dots appear in the improved image, decrease the value by one level.
650
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Color Printing Trouble
Color drift occur
Calibration needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the calibration.
1 Perform the calibration. Calibration begins.
Color registration (automatic correction) needs to be performed
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
651
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Color Registration Auto]
3 Print the chart
1 Select [Start]. A chart is printed. Chart Example
4 Perform the color registration.
1 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
2 Select [Start] to scan the chart. When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
3 Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
652
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting Color registration (manual correction) needs to be performed
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
2 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Color Registration Manual]
653
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Print the chart.
1 Select [Print Chart]. A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed. Chart Example
4 Enter the appropriate value.
1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5. From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center). 2 Select [Registration]. 3 Select the chart to be corrected. 4 Select the values read from the chart. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart. 6 Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins. 7 Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
654
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Colors appear different than you anticipated
Have you selected appropriate image quality for the original? Check the content structure of the original and change it to an appropriate image quality.
1 Select a [Original Image] for each function 2 Select the image quality that matches the type of the original
Original Image (page 323)
Is color copy paper set in the paper source? Set the color copy paper.
Calibration needs to be performed.
1 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Perform the calibration.
1 Perform the calibration. Calibration begins.
Is the color balance appropriate (in the case of copying)? Adjust the color balance.
1 From the [Color/ImageQuality] tab, select [Color Balance], and set it to [On] 2 Move the cursor of the color to be adjusted ("cyan", "magenta", "yellow", "black")
to adjust each color.
(For printing) Is the color adjustment appropriate? Adjust the color with the printer driver. Printer Driver User Guide
655
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The color toner is empty
If you want to continue printing in black and white, follow these steps: Black and white printing is possible temporarily.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Toner Settings] 2 [Color Toner Empty Action] > [Print in Black & White]
NOTE This setting is not valid when the optional Fiery Controller is installed.
656
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Remote Operation
This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.
Executing Remote Operation from Browser
The supported Browser is as follows. We recommend the latest version of browser to use Remote Operation. · Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later) · Microsoft Edge · Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later) · Safari (Version 5.0 or later) This section describes the procedure for performing remote operations from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.
NOTE To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following: Command Center RX User Guide
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings]
2 Set [Enhanced VNC (RFB) over TLS] to On. Protocol Settings (page 475)
NOTE You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
3 Configure settings for remote operation.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Connectivity" [Remote Operation] > ON 2 Select from [Off], [Use Password], [Administrator Only]
When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm Password", then select [OK]. Connectivity (page 487)
NOTE You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
657
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Restart the machine. Others (page 488)
5 Start up the browser. Specify https: // [Host name of this Machine] and start Command Center RX. Accessing Command Center RX (page 127)
6 [Device Information / Remote Operation] > [Remote Operation] 7 Click [Start].
NOTE · If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed on the
operation panel. Select [Yes]. · If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation, select Always
allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click [Completed]. Perform [Start] after waiting 1 minute or more. When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the system administrator's or user's PC screen.
658
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Executing Remote Operation from VNC Software
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [NetworkSettings] > "Network Settings" [Protocol Settings]
2 Set [VNC (RFB)] to On. Protocol Settings (page 475) NOTE · If "VNC (RFB) over TLS" is set to On, the communication is encrypted. · You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX. Command Center RX User Guide
3 Startup the remote operation.
1 Start up the VNC software. 2 Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.
"IP address: port number" NOTE
When setting "VNC (RFB)" to On in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When "VNC (RFB) over TLS" is set to On, the default port number is 9063. Protocol Settings (page 475)
659
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following: Checking the Equipment's Serial Number (page 2)
"Access point was not detected." is displayed
Check if the access point has been set correctly.
660
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Add paper to cassette #." is displayed
Is the indicated cassette out of paper? · Load paper.
Loading in the Cassettes (page 149) · Select paper from another paper feed source. · Select [Continue] to change the paper and print.
661
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Add paper in Multipurpose Tray." is displayed
Has the paper run out in the displayed paper source? · Load paper.
Loading in the Cassettes (page 149) Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 154) · Select paper from another source. · Select [Continue] to change the paper and print.
662
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Adjusting Scanner." is displayed
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain its quality. Please wait.
663
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Box limit exceeded." is displayed
Is [End] displayed on the screen? Jobs cannot be saved because the specified box is full. The job will be canceled. Select [End]. Print or delete the original in the box, and then try again.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
664
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Broadcast error" is displayed
An error occurred while broadcasting. The job is canceled. Select [End].
665
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Calibrating..." is displayed
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain its quality. Please wait.
666
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect to Authentication Server." is displayed
Does the machine time match the server's time? · Set the machine time to match the server's time
Setting Date and Time (page 77) Is it properly registered with the authentication server? · Enable User Login Administration.
Enable User Login Administration (page 522) · Set the network authentication server.
· Check the connection status with the server. · Confirm that the computer name and password for the authentication server are correct. Is the machine connected to the network correctly? Connecting LAN Cable (page 53) Network Setup (page 78) NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
667
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect to Server." is displayed
Check the connection status with the server.
668
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot connect." is displayed
Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct connection could not be completed. Check the settings and signal conditions. Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 462) Wi-Fi Settings (page 464)
669
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot duplex print on this paper." is displayed
Have you selected a size or type of paper that cannot be duplex printed? · Select [Continue] to cancel duplex printing and continue printing. · Select paper from a different paper source and press [Continue] to change the paper for printing. · To cancel, select [Cancel].
670
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot perform remote printing." is displayed
Remote printing is prohibited. The job is canceled. Select [End].
671
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot execute this job." is displayed
Restricted by the authorization settings. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Restricted by the job accounting. The job is canceled. Select [End].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
672
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot print the specified number of copies." is displayed
Only one copy is available. · Select [Continue] to continue printing. · Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
673
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot process this job." is displayed
Restricted by the authorization settings. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Restricted by the job accounting. The job is canceled. Select [End].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
674
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot read data in this ID card." is displayed
In registration process, the ID card information was not read correctly. Hold the IC card over the IC card reader again. If the same message is displayed again, the IC card may not be compatible with this product. Replace it with another IC card.
675
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot recognize the ID card reader." is displayed
· Check if the USB connector of your IC card reader is correctly connected to the main unit. · If [USB HOST] in [Interface Block Setting] is set to [Block], change it to [Unblock].
676
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The following parts or functions have been failure." is displayed
Follow the displayed instructions.
677
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot use following functions due to scanner failure. >> Copy, Send, Fax, Storing in Box" is displayed
The machine's scanner is out of order. Contact your service representative. You can still use the print function.
678
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot use following functions due to printer failure. >> Copy, Fax, Printing from Box, Print Report" is displayed
The machine's printer is out of order. Please contact the service representative. You can still use the scanner function.
679
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Cannot use ##### due to a failure." is displayed
Please contact the service representative.
680
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Check the toner container." is displayed
Open the scanner unit and take out the toner container. Shake the toner container well and set it again.
681
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Color toner is empty. Cannot print this document." is displayed
Replace with the toner container specified by us. NOTE
If there is still black toner left even after color toner has run out and "Color Toner Empty Action" is set to [Print in Black & White], black and white printing is possible temporarily.
682
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to activate." is displayed
Failed to activate the application. Contact administrator. Extended authentication is disabled. Turn the power switch off and then on again. If the error persists, contact administrator.
1 Turn the power switch off.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed. It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT · If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power
switch disables fax transmission and reception. · Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
683
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Are this machine and the scanned image destination PC connected to the network? Check the network. · Connecting LAN Cable · Hub behavior · The server status · Host name or IP address · Port number Connecting LAN Cable (page 53) Network Setup (page 78) Network Settings (page 460)
Is the account information (user ID, password) used to access the shared folder to which the scanned image is to be sent incorrect? Check the settings of the scanned image destination PC. · Host Name · Path · Login user name
NOTE If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. [Login User name]@[Domain name] Example) sa720XXXX@km · Login Password · Folder share permissions of the recipient
684
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to specify Job Accounting." is displayed
Failed to specify Job Accounting when processing the job externally. The job is canceled. Select [End].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
685
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Failed to store job retention data." is displayed
The job is canceled. Select [End].
686
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Subaddress box limit exceeded." is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to delete documents in the subaddress box. For canceled jobs, select the [Status/Job Cancel] key > [Printing Jobs], and check the print job log. FAX Operation Guide
687
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Incorrect account ID." is displayed
The account ID was incorrect when processing the job externally. The job is canceled. Select [End].
688
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Job Accounting restriction exceeded." is displayed
Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded? The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print any more. The job is canceled. Select [End].
689
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"KPDL error." is displayed
PostScript error has occurred. The job is canceled. Select [End].
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
690
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Machine failure." is displayed
Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the screen and contact service representative.
691
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maximum number of scanned pages." is displayed
Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded? Cannot scan pages any more. Follow the instructions on the screen.
692
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Memory is full." is displayed
The memory is full and the job cannot be continued. Select [Continue] to process a scanned page. The print job cannot be processed completely. Select [Cancel] to cancel the job. The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory. If only [End] is displayed, select [End]. The job is canceled. When insufficient memory occurred frequently, contact your dealer or service representative.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
693
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Paper jam." is displayed
A paper jam has occurred. If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the screen. Leave the machine on and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper. Jam Location Indicators (page 789)
694
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Performing Drum Refresh..." is displayed
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain quality. Please wait.
695
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Regulating the temperature..." is displayed
The machine is in adjustment mode to maintain quality. Please wait.
696
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Remove originals in Document Processor." is displayed
Are there any originals left in the document processor? Remove the original from the document processor.
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the Document Processor cover and remove the jammed paper.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
697
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4 Return the cover to the original position.
698
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Running security function..." is displayed
The security function is running. Please wait.
699
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Scanner memory is full." is displayed
Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of the scanner. Follow the instructions on the screen.
700
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Scheduled sending jobs exceeded." is displayed
The number of timer transmissions that can be set has been exceeded. Select [End]. The job is canceled. Wait until the delayed transmission is executed, or cancel the delayed transmission and then perform the job again.
701
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Select another cassette." is displayed
Is the selected cassette correct? The specified cassette is dedicated for the fax machine. Select another valid cassette and then select [Continue].
702
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Send error." is displayed
An error has occurred during sending. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Refer to the transmission error code list for the error code and its details. List of Transmission Error Codes (page 729)
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
703
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"System error." is displayed
System error has occurred. Follow the instruction displayed on the screen.
704
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The device cannot be connected because allowed connections would be exceeded." is displayed
Are you connecting more than the maximum number of Wi-Fi Direct connections? Disconnect the mobile devices that you are not using, or set the [automatic disconnection] of this unit to disconnect the mobile devices. Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 462)
705
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The password does not meet password policy." is displayed
Has your password expired? Change the login password. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Password Policy Settings (page 524) Have your password policy requirements changed (password length, strings of characters to use, etc.)? Check your password policy requirements and change the login password. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Password Policy Settings (page 524)
706
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Malicious program was detected." is displayed
Execution was aborted due to a possible malware program. The names of applications for which malware has been detected are displayed. Please contact the administrator.
707
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"RAM disk error." is displayed
A RAM disk error has occurred. The job is canceled. Select [End]. The following error code is possible: 04: There is not enough free space on the RAM disk. If the optional RAM disk is installed, increase the RAM disk size by using [RAM Disk Setting] in the System Menu. RAM Disk Setting (page 492)
NOTE The volume of RAM disk size can be increased by selecting [Printer Priority] in the [Optional Memory] settings. Others (page 513)
708
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for imaging units soon." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
709
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for paper cassette soon." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
710
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for Document Processor soon." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
711
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for imaging units." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
712
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for paper cassette." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
713
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for Multipurpose Tray." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
714
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Maintenance is needed for Document Processor." is displayed
Contact your service representative.
715
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The slit glass requires cleaning." is displayed
The slit glass requires cleaning. When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.
IMPORTANT Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
NOTE Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
716
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Toner[C][M][Y][K]is empty." is displayed
Replace the toner container to our specified toner container. NOTE
If there is still black toner left even after color toner has run out and "Color Toner Empty Action" is set to [Print in Black & White], black and white printing is possible temporarily.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the procedures for the yellow toner container, as an example.
1 Open the right cover.
2 Unlock the toner container
717
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Remove the toner container 4 Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.
5 Remove the new toner container from the box.
IMPORTANT Do not touch the points shown below.
718
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
6 Shake the toner container.
7 Install the toner container.
IMPORTANT Insert the toner container all the way.
8 Close the right cover.
NOTE · If the right cover not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly. · Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
719
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Toner [C][M][Y][K] is low. (Replace when empty.)" is displayed
It is almost time to replace the toner container. Obtain a new toner container.
720
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Toner type mismatch. Please install correct toner." is displayed
Does the type of toner you have match the model? Please install correct toner.
721
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"USB Drive error." is displayed
Is the USB drive write-protected? An error occurred in the USB drive. The job is canceled. Select [End]. The following error code is displayed: 01: Connect a writeable USB drive. An error occurred in the USB drive. The job is canceled. Select [End]. The following error code is displayed: 01: The amount of data that can be saved at once has been exceeded. Restart the system or turn the power OFF/ON. If the error persists, the USB drive is not compatible with the machine. Use the USB drive formatted by this machine. If the USB drive cannot be formatted, it is damaged. Connect a compatible USB drive.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
722
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"USB Drive is full." is displayed
There is not enough free space on the USB drive. The job is canceled. Select [End]. Delete unnecessary files on the USB drive.
NOTE If Auto Error Clear is set to [On], the process will resume automatically after a set period of time. For details, refer to the following: Error Handling (page 421)
723
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"The USB Drive is not formatted." is displayed
Is the USB drive formatted by this machine? Execute [Format] of the USB drive on this machine.
1 Display the screen.
1 Select the [Home] key. 2 Select [...] > [Device Information] Confirmation on the machine status or window for operation will
appear.
2 Select [Format] of "USB Drive"
IMPORTANT When [Format] is selected, all data in the USB drive is erased.
724
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Warning for high temp. Adjust the room temp." is displayed
Print quality may be deteriorated. Adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room.
725
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Warning for low temp. Adjust the room temp." is displayed
Print quality may be deteriorated. Adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room.
726
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"Warning low memory." is displayed
Cannot start the job. Try again later.
727
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
"You cannot use this box." is displayed
You do not have permission to use the specified box. The job is canceled. Select [End].
728
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
List of Transmission Error Codes
1101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1101 Corrective Actions Enter the host name of the SMTP server in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] of the [Functions] Menu. 5 Check the [SMTP Server Name] in "SMTP".
Correct anything that is incorrect.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
729
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1101 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. > Login user name and login password Note: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. > Host name > Path Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1101 Corrective Actions Check the host name of the destination computer.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer is correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 261)
NOTE If you are a domain user, specify the domain name.
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer is correct.
NOTE If you are a domain user, specify the domain name.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [Register] > [OK]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
730
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name or IP address of FTP. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1101 Corrective Actions Check the host name of the FTP.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the FTP server is correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 265) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the FTP server is correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [Register] > [OK]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
731
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the followings on the Command Center RX > SMTP login user name and login password > POP3 login user name and login password 1102 Corrective Actions Check the login user name and password for the SMTP server and POP3 server.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] in the [Functions] 5 Check whether the login user name and password for the SMTP server have
been entered in [Authentication Protocol] of "SMTP", and change the settings as necessary.
6 Click [Settings] in "POP3 User Settings" 7 Check whether the login user name and password have been entered and change
the settings as necessary.
8 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
732
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. > Login user name and login password Note: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. > Host name > Path Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1102 Corrective Actions Check the login user name and password of the destination computer.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer is correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 261)
NOTE · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name · If you use a host name, make sure it does not contain the following forbidden characters:
` ~ ! @ # $ ^ & * ( ) = + [ ] { } \ | ; : ' " < > / ?
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer are correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it.
NOTE · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name · If you use a host name, make sure it does not contain the following forbidden characters:
` ~ ! @ # $ ^ & * ( ) = + [ ] { } \ | ; : ' " < > / ?
733
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting 4 [Register] > [OK] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
734
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1102 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. > Login user name and login password Note: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1102 Corrective Actions Check the login user name and password for the FTP.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the FTP server is correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 265)
NOTE · If you are a domain user, specify the domain name. · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [Home] key > [...] > [System Menu] > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the FTP are correct.
NOTE · If you are a domain user, specify the domain name. · If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows.
Domain name\User name
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [Register] > [OK]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
735
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1103 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. > Login user name and login password Note: If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name. > Path > Folder share permissions of the recipient Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1103 Corrective Actions Check the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path are correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 261)
NOTE If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer are correct.
If it is incorrect, correct it.
NOTE If the computer name and domain name are different, check that they are entered as follows. Domain name\User name
4 [Register] > [OK] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
736
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3 Make sure the folder sharing settings are configured correctly Check the sharing settings and permissions in the folder properties. 1 Right-click the shared folder and click [Properties] [Security] tab. 2 Select a user and make sure the user you entered in the group name or user name field is displayed 3 Make sure that [Allow] is checked off for "Modify" and "Read & Execute" 4 Click the [Close] button. Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 161)
737
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1103 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. > Login user name and login password 1103 Corrective Actions Check the destination folder path.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the login user name and password of the destination computer, and the destination folder path are correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 265)
NOTE If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Make sure that the destination folder path is correct.
NOTE If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [Register] > [OK]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
738
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1104 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the email address. Note: If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot send the email. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1104 Corrective Actions Check the Email Address.
1 When entering the destination information, make sure that the email address is correct. Sending Document via E-mail (page 259) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book] 2 Select the information icon for the destination. 3 Check the Email Address
If it is incorrect, correct it. 4 [Register] > [OK]
Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186) If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
3 Make sure your email address is not rejected due to domain restrictions
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] in the [Functions] 5 Click [Domain List] in "SMTP"
The SMTP domain restriction list is displayed. 6 If the email address you use is included in the list, delete it. 7 Click [Submit] twice.
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
739
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1105 Corrective Actions From Command Center RX, check that SMTP (email sending) is On.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Protocols] of the [Network Settings] Menu. 5 Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
740
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1105 Corrective Actions Make sure the protocol is set correctly.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Protocols] in the [Network Settings] 5 Set "SMB" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
741
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1105 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1105 Corrective Actions Make sure the protocol is set correctly.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Protocols] in the [Network Settings] 5 Set "FTP Client (Transmission)" in "Send Protocol" to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
742
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1106 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1106 Corrective Actions Check the sender address on the SMTP server from Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] of the [Functions] Menu. 5 Set the [Sender Address] in "E-mail Send Settings".
Please specify an email address that can be received by the Machine Administrator. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 256 characters.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
743
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1131 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1131 Corrective Actions Please set to allow the use of TLS.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [Network Security] in the [Security Settings] 5 Set [TLS] to [On] 6 Click [Submit].
Command Center RX User Guide
744
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
1132 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP server. > FTPS is available. > Encryption is available. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 1132 Corrective Actions Check the destination server.
1 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS) If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
2 Make sure the destination server supports the encryption method you have set.
745
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the network and Command Center RX > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. > POP3 server name of the POP3 user > SMTP server name Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2101 Corrective Actions Check Command Center RX and network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Check the host name of the SMTP server in Command Center RX.
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] in the [Functions] 5 Check "SMTP" [SMTP Server Name]
Correct anything that is incorrect. 6 Click [Submit].
If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
746
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
5 Check the users in POP before SMTP authentication in Command Center RX. Set this when using POP before SMTP as SMTP authentication. 1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] in the [Functions] 5 Select "Authentication Protocol" [POP before SMTP] 6 Check that [Other] is not selected from "Authenticate as" If this is not the case, select a valid POP3 user other than [Other]. 7 Click [Submit] twice. If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
6 Check the POP3 server name for POP3 users in Command Center RX
1 Launch a web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] in the [Functions] 5 Click "POP3 User Settings" [Settings]
The "POP3 User Settings" screen is displayed. 6 Check the [POP3 Server Name] of "user 1 (to 3)".
Correct anything that is incorrect. 7 Click [Submit] twice.
747
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB.
Check the network and SMB settings. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. > Host name and IP address > Port number Job is canceled. Press [End].
2101 Corrective Actions Check your network and SMB settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 261) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
5 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
2 Select the information icon for the destination.
3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. If it is incorrect, correct it.
4 [Register] > [OK] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
748
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP.
Check the network and FTP settings. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. > Host name and IP address > Port number Job is canceled. Press [End].
2101 Corrective Actions Check your network and FTP settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 When entering the destination information, make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 265) To specify a destination registered in the address book, proceed to the next step.
5 Check the Address Book
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Function Settings] > [Address Book] > [Add/Edit Machine Address Book]
2 Select the information icon for the destination.
3 Make sure that the host name or IP address of the destination computer and the port number are correct. If it is incorrect, correct it.
4 [Register] > [OK] Register the changed destination. Editing Contact Address in Address Book (page 186)
749
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2102 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2102 Corrective Actions Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
750
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2102 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP server. > FTP is available. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2102 Corrective Actions Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS)
751
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2103 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2103 Corrective Actions Check your network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
752
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2103 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2103 Corrective Actions Check your network and destination server settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the status of the server. Check that the server is up and responding with ping. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
4 Make sure the destination server supports FTPS (File Transfer Protocol over TLS)
753
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2201 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
754
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2201 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
755
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2201 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2201 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
756
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2202 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2202 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
757
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2202 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2202 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
758
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2203 "Failed to send via SMB." is displayed
Message Failed to send via SMB. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2203 Corrective Actions Check your network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
759
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2203 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2203 Corrective Actions Check the network.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
760
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2204 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the email size limit of the SMTP settings on the Command Center RX Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2204 Corrective Actions Check the size restrictions for email sending in the SMTP settings in Command Center RX.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name. 3 Log in with administrator privileges. 4 Click [E-mail] of the [Functions] Menu. 5 Check whether a restriction value is entered in [E-mail Size Limit] of "E-mail Send
Settings", and change it as necessary.
6 Click [Submit]. SMTP and E-mail Settings (page 130)
761
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
2231 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 2231 Corrective Actions Check your network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
762
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3101 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 3101 Corrective Actions Check the source and destination authentication methods.
1 Check the source and destination authentication methods. Make sure that the settings for using or not using SMTP/POP authentication of the source matches those of the destination.
763
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3101 "Failed to send via FTP." is displayed
Message Failed to send via FTP. Check the network. > The network cable is connected. > The hub is not operating properly. > The server is not operating properly. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 3101 Corrective Actions Check your network settings.
1 Connect the network cable Check that the LAN cable is properly connected. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
2 Check the operation of the hub. Check that the hub access lamp is illuminated or flashing. If there is no improvement, proceed to the next step.
3 Check the server status. Make sure the server is running and responds to pings.
764
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
3201 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 3201 Corrective Actions
1 Check the destination SMTP user authentication method
765
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4801 "Job is canceled. Press [End]." is displayed
Message Job is canceled. Press [End]. Corrective Actions Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact the service representative.
766
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4802 "Failed to send the email." is displayed
Message Failed to send the email. Check the encryption certificate of each destination by the Command Center RX. Job is canceled. Press [End]. 4802 Corrective Actions Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact the service representative.
767
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4803 "Job is canceled. Press [End]." is displayed
Message Job is canceled. Press [End]. Corrective Actions Server authentication has expired. Check your network and SMTP settings.
1 Check the date and time of this machine
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [DeviceSettings] > [Date/Time] 2 Set year, month, day and seconds
If the problem persists, proceed to the next step.
2 Make sure the server is using the correct certificate If the server certificate has expired, please renew it.
768
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
4804 "Job is canceled. Press [End]." is displayed
Message Job is canceled. Press [End]. Corrective Actions When communicating with the mail server using SMTP over TLS, communication cannot be started because the signature algorithm of the server certificate does not match the signature algorithm set on the machine. Please access from Command Center RX to [Security Settings] > [Network Security]. Then, check the value of [Hash] of "Serverside Settings" and [Hash] of [Clientside Settings] and match it with the value on the server side. Restart the machine after setting. Command Center RX User Guide
769
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4901 is displayed
An error occurred while validating the server certificate. Corrective Actions Check the SMTP server certificate.
770
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4902 is displayed
Your certificate has expired. Corrective Actions Check the SMTP server certificate.
771
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4903 is displayed
An error occurred while validating the X509 certificate. Corrective Actions Check the X509 certificate.
772
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4904 is displayed
The certificate has been revoked. Corrective Actions Check the SMTP server certificate.
773
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4905 is displayed
An error occurred while setting the encryption / signing certificate. Corrective Actions Check the settings related to the certificate and the imported certificate. Command Center RX User Guide
774
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4906 is displayed
Certificate verification did not complete within the set time. Corrective Actions · Check the verification environment of the OCSP/CRL certificate and other certificates · Extend the timeout deadline · Change the certificate verification level Command Center RX User Guide
775
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a02 is displayed
Failed to initialize S/MIME. Corrective Actions Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
776
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a03 is displayed
Failed to specify S/MIME encryption. Corrective Actions Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
777
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a04 is displayed
Failed to scan the S/MIME encryption certificate. Corrective Actions · Check and correct the settings related to the S/MIME certificate. · Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on
the touch panel, check the operation description and then contact the service representative. Command Center RX User Guide
778
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a06 is displayed
Failed to specify job accounting S/MIME Signature. Corrective Action Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel, check the operation description and then contact the service representative.
779
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a07 is displayed
Failed to scan the S/MIME signature certificate. Corrective Actions · Check and correct the settings related to the S/MIME signature certificate. · Turn the power switch off and then on again. If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on
the touch panel, check the operation description and then contact the service representative. Command Center RX User Guide
780
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
The error code 4a08 is displayed
The sender's email address and the email address on the signature certificate do not match. Corrective Actions Check the sender's email address and the email address on the signature certificate, and correct the email address(es).
781
Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Other error code "Job is canceled. Press [End]." is displayed
Message Job is canceled. Press [End]. Corrective Actions Press [End] and restart the machine.
1 Turn the power switch off and then on again If it occurs repeatedly, write down the error code displayed on the touch panel and contact the service representative.
782
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/ Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can carry out.
Item
[Color Registration - Auto] [Color Registration - Manual] [Image Adjustment]
Description
Correct the color position to resolve color drift. Color Registration Procedure (page 784)
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 minute and 20 seconds. The time required may vary depending on the usage environment.
Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure correct toner overlapping and consistency with the original tone. Perform image adjustment (page 788)
NOTE
· Drum refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute drum refresh after the printing is done.
· Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
· When correct toner overlapping is not ensured even after performing calibration, refer to the following:
Color Registration Procedure (page 784)
783
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Color Registration Procedure
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual registration.
IMPORTANT Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration. If color drift remains, perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
Auto Correction
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
2 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Color Registration Auto]
784
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
3 Print the chart
1 Select [Start]. A chart is printed. Chart Example
4 Perform the color registration.
1 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with the arrows toward the back.
2 Select [Start] to scan the chart. When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
3 Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
785
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Manual Correction
1 Load paper.
IMPORTANT · Load the paper with the print side facing up. · After removing new paper from its packaging, fan out the paper before loading it in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper (page 147) · Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. · Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration above). · If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
2 Display the screen.
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Color Registration Manual]
786
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
3 Print the chart.
1 Select [Print Chart]. A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed. Chart Example
4 Enter the appropriate value.
1 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5. From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center). 2 Select [Registration]. 3 Select the chart to be corrected. 4 Select the values read from the chart. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart. 6 Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins. 7 Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
787
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Perform image adjustment
1 Display the screen
1 [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Image Adjustment" [Image Adjustment]
2 Execute.
1 Select the item to execute. 2 Execute it.
If you select multiple items, they will start in sequence.
788
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display "Paper jam." and the machine will stop.
Jam Location Indicators
1 Shows the location of a paper jam. 2 Selecting [Hold] displays [Status] screen, and the status of jobs can be checked. 3 Selecting [Start Help] displays the detailed removal procedure.
NOTE For the Help screen, refer to the following: Help Screen (page 72) 4 Shows the removal procedure. 5 Select [Display Error] to return to the paper jam guidance 6 Displays the next step. 7 Displays the previous step. 8 Displays the first step. If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
789
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Paper Jam Location Indicator
Paper Jam Location
A
Cassette 1
Remove any jammed papers in Cassette 1 (page 793)
B
Cassette 2
Remove any jammed papers in Cassette 1 (page 793)
C
Multipurpose Tray
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 791)
D
Document Processor
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic) (page 799)
E
Duplex Unit
Remove the paper jammed in the Rear Cover 1 (page 796)
F
Rear Cover1
Remove the paper jammed in the Rear Cover 1 (page 796)
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
790
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove any jammed paper.
2 Remove all the paper.
3 Close the multipurpose tray and pull-out cassette 1.
791
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Open the feed cover. 5 Remove any jammed paper. 6 Return the feed cover to its original position and return cassette 1 to its original
position.
7 Open the multipurpose tray and reload the paper.
792
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed papers in Cassette 1
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Push Cassette 1 back in.
793
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2
CAUTION
· Do not reuse jammed papers. · If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Open rear cover 2
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Push Rear Cover 2.
794
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.
5 Remove any jammed paper. 6 Push Cassette 2 back in.
795
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove the paper jammed in the Rear Cover 1
1 Open Rear Cover 1
CAUTION
Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
2 Remove any jammed paper.
3 Open the cover (A).
796
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Remove any jammed paper. 5 Open the feed cover (B). 6 Remove any jammed paper. 7 Open the duplex unit (C).
797
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
8 Remove any jammed paper. 9 Push Rear Cover 1.
798
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor (Reverse Automatic)
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
1 Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2 Open the Document Processor cover and remove the jammed paper.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
799
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4 Return the cover to the original position.
800
Appendix
11 Appendix
Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................802 Overview of the Applications .................................................................................................803 Character Entry Method .........................................................................................................805 About Paper .............................................................................................................................809 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................824 Backing up your data ..............................................................................................................831 Security Quick Setup Function List ........................................................................................833
801
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Option configuration
The following enhancements are available for this model.
1 PF-5110 <Paper feeder> The paper feeder can be installed in the machine.
2 Card Authentication Kit(B) AC <IC card authentication kit (Activate)> It is possible to make the user authentication with IC card. In order to perform the user authentication with IC card, IC card information has to be registered to the local user list in advance. Refer to the following for the method of the registration. IC CARD AUTHENTICATION KIT (B) OPERATION GUIDE
3 UG-51 <Trusted Platform Module> It is possible to protect the confidential information safely with this option. The encryption key used for the encrypted confidential information is stored in the exclusive storing area of the TMP chip. Since it is not possible to scan in this storing area from the outside of the TPM, the confidential information can protect safely.
4 USB Keyboard A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.
Software option
1 UG-33 AC <ThinPrint expansion kit (Activate)> It is possible print the print data directly even without the print driver.
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card
Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or automatically when you power on or reset the machine.
802
Appendix > Overview of the Applications
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine. · Data Security Kit · ThinPrint Option
This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time. · Card Authentication Kit
This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
NOTE · Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application. · If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to
use the application.
Starting Application Use
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Add/DeleteApplication] > "Optional Function" [Optional Function List]
NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select the preferred application >[Activate] You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting
(information icon).
3 Enter the license key > [Official] Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4 Select [Start] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE · If you started the Data Encryption/Overwrite or UG-33 AC, turn the power OFF/ON. · Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
803
Appendix > Overview of the Applications
Checking Details of Application
1 Display the screen. [System Menu/Counter] key > [Add/DeleteApplication] > "Optional Function List" [Optional Function List] NOTE If the user authentication screen appears, log in with a user who has the privilege to configure this setting. If you do not know your login user name or password, please contact your administrator.
2 Select (information icon) for the application whose detailed information you want to check. The detail information is available on the selected application. The items that can be referenced are as follows: · Function Name · License · Remaining Trial Counts · Expiration Date of Trial · Status NOTE To extend the trial period, select [Extend].
804
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE Keyboard Layout "QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the [System Menu/Counter] key, [DeviceSettings], [Keyboard] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout. "QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
1 Keyboard Select the character to enter.
2 Input box Enter characters in the selected box.
3 Tab key Select to move to the next input box.
805
Appendix > Character Entry Method 4 Shift key
Select to switch between upper case and lower-case. 5 ?123 / Character
Select the characters that are entered. 6 Space key
Select to insert a space. 7 Cursor key
Select to move the cursor on the display. 8 Close key
Select to close the entry screen. 9 Enter key
Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry. 10 Backspace key
Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor. 11 Input / Limit display
Displays maximum number of characters and the number of characters entered.
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Select the Shift key.
806
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Select ?123.
807
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List #1' for an example
1 Enter 'List', (space).
To switch between upper case and lower-case, select the Shift key.
2 Enter '#' and '1'.
To enter numbers or symbols, select #123.
3 Check that the entry is correct.
Check that the entry is correct. Select enter.
808
Appendix > About Paper
About Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source. For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the following: Specifications (page 824)
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine.
Criteria Weight
Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners Moisture Content Pulp content
Specifications Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2 Multipurpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 ±0.7 mm 90° ±0.2° 4 to 6% 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
809
Appendix > About Paper
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Using such paper can cause poor print quality. In addition, poor paper feeding can cause paper jams and shorten the life of the machine. Use paper with a smooth and even surface. However, do not use paper that has been surface-treated, such as coating, as it may damage the drum and fusing unit.
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum. Be sure to use standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp. Be sure to use standard paper with 20% or less of the paper content consisting of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres. Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast. Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%. To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations. · Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place. · Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be
used for a while. · Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the box to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors. · Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours. · Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
810
Appendix > About Paper
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test. · Glossy paper · Watermarked paper · Paper with an uneven surface · Perforated paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine. Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Paper Size
Cassette 1
Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")
Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Cassette 2
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Multipurpose Tray
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
811
Appendix > About Paper
Paper Size
Cassette 1
Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2") Letter (8-1/2 × 11")
Legal (8-1/2 × 14")
A4 (297 × 210 mm)
B5 (257 × 182 mm)
A5-R (148 × 210mm)
A5 (210 × 148 mm)
A6 (148 × 105 mm)
B6 (182 × 128 mm)
Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8") Envelope #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2") ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)
Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm) Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm) Oficio II (8-1/2 × 13")
216 × 340 mm
16K (273 × 197 mm)
Statement (5-1/2 × 8-1/2") Folio (210 × 330 mm)
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
Nagagata 3 (120 × 235mm)
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Cassette 2
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Paper of this size cannot be set
Multipurpose Tray
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
812
Appendix > About Paper
Paper Size
Nagagata 4 (90 × 205mm) Younaga 3 (235 ×120mm) Kakugata
Size Input
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Paper of this size cannot Paper of this size cannot
be set
be set
Paper of this size cannot Paper of this size cannot
be set
be set
Paper of this size cannot Paper of this size cannot
be set
be set
Cassette 1: 105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm Cassette 2: 105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm Multipurpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm
Multipurpose Tray
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
Paper of this size can be set
813
Appendix > About Paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. The following paper and media can be used. · Transparencies · Preprint · Bond paper · Recycled paper · Vellum · Rough · Letterhead · Colored Paper · Prepunched paper · Envelopes · Hagaki (Cardstock) · Thick Paper · Labels · Coated Paper · High-quality paper When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparency, labels, vellum, envelope, cardstock, coated.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper. Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.
814
Appendix > About Paper
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
Heat resistance Thickness Material Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners
Must withstand at least 190°C 0.100 to 0.110 mm Polyester ±0.7 mm 90° ±0.2°
To avoid trouble, be sure to load transparencies in portrait orientation (i.e., the longer edge facing the machine). If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
815
Appendix > About Paper
Labels
Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure. When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems. The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure. Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output.
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Top sheet weight Basis weight(overall paper weight) Top sheet thickness Overall paper thickness Moisture Content
44 to 74 g/m2 104 to 151 g/m2 0.086 to 0.107 mm 0.115 to 0.145 mm 4 to 6 % (composite)
816
Appendix > About Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multipurpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock) paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams. Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock) on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
817
Appendix > About Paper
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up.
NOTE Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper feeder. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them. Keep the following points in mind. · Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the
adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. · Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window. · If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
818
Appendix > About Paper
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
819
Appendix > About Paper
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications. Basic Paper Specifications (page 809) In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
820
Appendix > About Paper
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications Basic Paper Specifications (page 809) The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
821
Appendix > About Paper
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately. Basic Paper Specifications (page 809)
NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
822
Appendix > About Paper
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high-quality printing. The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
823
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
IMPORTANT Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following: FAX Operation Guide
Machine
Item Model Type Printing Method Paper Weight (Cassette) Paper Weight (Multipurpose Tray) Paper Type (Cassette)
Paper Type (Multipurpose Tray)
Paper Size (Cassette)
Paper Size (Multipurpose Tray)
Printed Image Margin Width Warm-up Time (23°C/73.4°F, 60%) Warm-up Time (23°C/73.4°F, 60%) Paper Capacity (Cassette) Paper Capacity (Multipurpose Tray) Output Tray Capacity (Inner tray) Image Write System Image Memory
Specifications
ECOSYS MA2600cwfx/ECOSYS MA2600cfx/ECOSYS MA2600cwx
Desktop
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser 60 to 163 g/m2 60 to 220 g/m2
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as duplex printing).
Plain, Transparency (OHP Film), Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Rough, Vellum, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick, High Quality, Labels, Envelope, Hagaki (Cardstock), Coated, Custom 1 to 8
A4, A5, A5-R, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, 216×340 mm, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, Statement, Folio, ISO B5, Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
A4, A5, A5-R, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, 216 × 340 mm, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, Statement, Statement-R, Folio, ISO B5, Envelope Monarch, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 2, Youkei 4, Nagagata 3, Nagagata 4, Younaga 3, Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
4.2 mm
29 seconds or less (from power ON)
13 seconds or less (from sleep) 250 sheets (80 g/m2, A4/Letter or smaller)
50 sheets
150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
1 GB
824
Appendix > Specifications
Item
Specifications
Interface (Standard)
Operating Environment (Temperature) Operating Environment (Humidity) Operating Environment (Altitude) Operating Environment (Brightness) Dimension (W × D × H) Weight (Without toner container) Space Required (W × D) (when using multipurpose tray) Power Source
Power consumption in Off mode and network standby
Options
· Hi-Speed USB: 1 · Network Interface: 1 (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) · Hi-Speed USB: 1 (USB flash memory slot) · Wireless LAN supported*1* · FAX: 1*2* 10 to 32.5°C
10 to 80% 3,500 m and below 1,500 lux and below
410 x 410 x 457 mm 25 kg/55.12 lb 417 x 613 mm
120 V AC, 60 Hz: 8.6 A 220-240 V AC, 50 Hz: 5.7 A The information is available at the website below. https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/en/about-us/our-brand/ environmental-policy.html Option configuration (page 802)
*1 ECOSYS MA2600cwfx, ECOSYS MA2600cwx *2 ECOSYS MA2600cwfx, ECOSYS MA2600cfx
825
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Copy Speed
Paper Size A4R/A5 LetterR Legal B5R A5R A6R 16K *1 14ppm after the 16th sheet
Black and White
26 sheets/min 27 sheets/min 22 sheets/min 27 sheets/min *1 27 sheets/min *1 27 sheets/min *1 27 sheets/min
When "EcoPrint" is on. Models for Europe.
Paper Size
A4 Letter/Statement-R/A5-R B5 A5/Statement A6 Legal
Black and White
17.5 sheets/min 18.5 sheets/min 8 sheets/min 23.5 sheets/min 18 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
Color 26 sheets/min 27 sheets/min 22 sheets/min 27 sheets/min*1 27 sheets/min *1 27 sheets/min *1 27 sheets/min
Color 17.5 sheets/min 18.5 sheets/min 8 sheets/min 23.5 sheets/min 18 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
Others
Item First Copy Time (A4, placed on the platen, feed from Cassette)
Zoom Level
Continuous Copying Resolution Original Type Original Feed System
Description
Black & White 8.0 seconds or less
Color 10 seconds or less
Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Preset zoom levels: 400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25% 1 to 998 sheets 600 × 600 dpi Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 216×356 mm) Fixed
826
Appendix > Specifications
Printer Function
Print Speed
Paper Size A4R/A5 Letter-R Legal B5R A5R A6R 16K *1 14ppm after the 16th sheet
Others
Item First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette)
Resolution
Operating System
Interface
Page Description Language Emulation
Black and White
26 sheets/min 27 sheets/min 22 sheets/min 21 sheets/min*1 21 sheets/min*1 21 sheets/min*1 27 sheets/min
Color
26 sheets/min 27 sheets/min 22 sheets/min 21 sheets/min*1 21 sheets/min*1 21 sheets/min*1 27 sheets/min
Description
Black & White 9.5 seconds or less
Color 10.5 seconds or less
· Equivalent of 9600 dpi × 600 dpi · Equivalent of 1200 dpi × Equivalent of 1200 dpi · Windows 10 · Windows 11 · Windows Server 2016 · Mac OS X v10.9 or higher · USB Interface Connector: 1 (Super-Speed USB) · Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T) · Optional Interface (Option): 1 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting) · Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-37/IB-38 mounting) PRESCRIBE · PCL6 (PCL5c/PCL-XL) · KPDL3 AES · PDF Direct Print · XPS
827
Appendix > Specifications
Scanner Functions
Scanning Speed (A4 landscape, 300 dpi × 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
1-Sided 2-Sided
Item
Black and White 27 sheets/min 54 sheets/min*1
Color 22 sheets/min*1 44 sheets/min*1
*1 Depending on the timing of using Document Processor, the loading speed may decrease.
Others
Resolution
Item
File Format Interface Transmission System
Description
· 200 dpi x 200 dpi (Default) · 300 dpi x 300 dpi · 200 dpi x 100 dpi · 600dpi x 600dpi · 400dpi x 400dpi · 200dpi x 400dpi TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), XPS, PDF/A, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF, OPEN XPS Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB, Wireless LAN support*1 SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*2, WSD
*1 ECOSYS MA2600cwfx / ECOSYS MA2600cwx
*2 Available Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 10/ Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2016
828
Appendix > Specifications
Document Processor
Item Original Type Original Size
Original Weight Loading Capacity
Description
Sheet originals Maximum: Legal/Folio Minimum: Statement-R/A6-R 60 to 90 g/m2 50 sheets (60 to 80 g/m2) maximum Up to upper limit height line in the document processor
829
Appendix > Specifications
Paper Feeder (250-sheet)
Setting Paper Supply Method
Paper Size Supported Paper
Dimensions (W × D × H) Weight
Specifications
Friction retard feeder Capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2) 1 cassette A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 x 340mm, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm) Paper thickness: 60 to 163 g/m2 Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special Paper 410 × 447.5 × 147 mm / 16.15" × 17.62" × 5.79" Approx. 3.6 kg / Approx 7.94 lb
830
Appendix > Backing up your data
Backing up your data
If the memory of this machine installed in the machine failed for any reason, the files in the box, fax received data and various settings saved there will be deleted and cannot be restored. To prevent erasing data, make regular backups as follows. · Take a backup using KYOCERA Net Viewer.
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer (page 831) · Take a backup using Command Center RX.
Backing up your data using Command Center RX (page 832) · Back up your data using a USB drive.
Backing up your data using USB Drive
Backing up your data using KYOCERA Net Viewer
Use KYOCERA Net Viewer to regularly back up the data below that is saved on the machine. · System Settings · Network Settings · User List · Address Book · Document Box Settings (Except for the file in the Custom Box)
Migrating the Address Book (page 135)
831
Appendix > Backing up your data
Backing up your data using Command Center RX
Use Command Center RX to regularly back up data saved in the Document Box and Subaddress Box to your PC. This section describes the procedure for backing up the data in the document box. Subaddress box can be backed up using the same procedure.
1 Display the screen.
1 Launch your Web browser. 2 In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name. In the home screen [...] > [Device Information] > [Identification/Wired NW] > [Wired Network] Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
2 Download Document
1 Select the document data you want to download to your PC. Only the data of one document can be downloaded at a time.
2 Click the [Download] icon. The selected document is displayed in [Selected Files]. 3 Specify the [Image Quality] and [File Format] as needed. 4 Click [Download].
832
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Security Quick Setup Function List
The functions configured in each level of Security Quick Setup are as follows. After selecting the security level, configure the security function according to your operating environment.
TLS
Level 1 On
Level 2 On
Level 3 On
833
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Serverside Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
TLS Version
Level 1 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 2 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Effective Encryption
Level 1
3DES, AES, AES-GCM, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 2
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 3
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Hash
Level 1 SHA1, SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
IPP Security
Level 1 Secure Only (IPPS)
Level 2 Secure Only (IPPS)
Level 3 Secure Only (IPPS)
HTTP Security
Level 1 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Level 2 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Level 3 Secure Only (HTTPS)
Enhanced WSD Security
Level 1
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
Level 2
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
Level 3
Secure Only (Enhanced WSD over TLS)
eSCL Security
Level 1 Secure (eSCL over TLS)
Level 2 Secure Only (eSCL over TLS)
Level 3 Secure Only (eSCL over TLS)
Rest Security
Level 1 Secure (REST over TLS)
Level 2 -
Level 3 -
834
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Clientside Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
TLS Version
Level 1 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 2 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Level 3 TLS1.2, TLS1.3
Effective Encryption
Level 1
3DES, AES, AES-GCM, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 2
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Level 3
AES-GCM, AES, CHACHA20/ POLY1305
Hash
Level 1 SHA1, SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
835
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv4 Settings (Wired Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
Level 1 Off
Auto
Level 2
Level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
836
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv4 Settings (Wireless Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
Level 1 Off
Auto
Level 2
Level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
837
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv6 Settings (Wired Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
Level 1 Off
Auto
Level 2
Level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
838
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
IPv6 Settings (Wireless Network)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
DNS over TLS
Level 1 Off
Auto
Level 2
Level 3 On
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
839
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocols: FTP Client (Transmission)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
840
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: HTTP (Client)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
841
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: SOAP
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Use Default Settings
Level 1 On
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
842
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols: LDAP
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Use Default Settings
Level 1 Off
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
843
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocols: SMTP (E-mail TX)
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
844
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Email: POP3 User Settings
The setting item which can be set or configured from Command Center RX.
Certificate Auto Verification
Level 1 Expiration Date
Level 2 Expiration Date
Level 3 Expiration Date
Hash
Level 1 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 2 SHA-2(256/384)
Level 3 SHA-2(256/384)
845
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Print protocols
LPD
Level 1
On
On
FTP (Receiving)
Level 1
On
Off
IPP
Level 1
On
Off
IPP over TLS
Level 1
On
On
Raw
Level 1
On
On
ThinPrint
Level 1
On
Off
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
NOTE This is available if the optional application is enabled.
ThinPrint over TLS Level 1
On
Level 2 --*1
--*1
Level 3
NOTE This is available if the optional application is enabled.
*1 If you select [Level 2] or [Level 3] in "Security Quick Setup", this setting will disappear.
846
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
WSD Print
Level 1
On
Off
POP (E-mail RX)
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
847
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Send Protocol
FTP Client (Transmission)
Level 1
On
Off
SMB
Level 1
On
On
WSD Scan
Level 1
On
Off
eSCL
Level 1
On
Off
eSCL over TLS
Level 1
On
On
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
848
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Other Protocols
SNMPv1/v2c
Level 1
On
On
SNMPv3
Level 1
Off
Off
HTTP
Level 1
On
Off
HTTPS
Level 1
On
On
Enhanced WSD
Level 1
On
Off
Enhanced WSD (TLS)
Level 1
On
On
LDAP
Level 1
Off
Off
LLTD
Level 1
Off
Off
REST
Level 1
On
Off
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
849
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
REST over TLS
Level 1
On
On
VNC (RFB)
Level 1
Off
Off
VNC (RFB) over TLS
Level 1
Off
Off
Enhanced VNC (RFB) over TLS
Level 1
On
Off
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 On
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
Level 3 Off
850
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
TCP/IP: Bonjour Settings
Bonjour
Level 1
On
On
Level 2
Level 3 Off
851
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2
Level 3 Off
852
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Connectivity
Bluetooth Settings
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2
Level 3 Off
853
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Interface Block Setting
USB Host
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
USB Device
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
USB Drive
Unblock
Level 1
Unblock
Level 2 Level 2 Level 2
Block
Level 3
Block
Level 3
Block
Level 3
854
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Energy Saver/Timer
Auto Panel Reset
Level 1
On
On
Level 2
Level 3 On
855
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
User Account Lockout Setting
Lockout
Level 1 Off
Level 2 Off
Level 3 On
856
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Job Status/Job Logs Settings
Display Jobs Detail Status
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Display Jobs Log
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Display Fax Log
Show All
Level 1
Show All
Level 2
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
Level 3 Hide All (Display only when Administrator
857
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Edit Restriction
Address Book
Level 1
Off
Off
One-Touch Key
Level 1
Off
Off
Level 2 Level 2
Level 3 Administrator only
Level 3 Administrator only
858
Appendix > Security Quick Setup Function List
Prevent Mis-sending Settings
Destination Check before Send
Level 1
Level 2
-
Off
On
Entry Check for New Dest.
Level 1
Level 2
-
Off
On
New Destination Entry
Permit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Prohibit
New destination entry (FAX)
Level 1
Level 2
Permit
Permit
--*1
*1 If you select [Level 3] in "Security Quick Setup", this setting will disappear.
Recall Destination
Prohibit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Prohibit
Broadcast
Permit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Prohibit
Destination History Usage
Permit
Level 1
Permit
Level 2
Prohibit
Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3 Level 3
859
For the Kyocera contact in your region, see Sales Sites sections here. https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/company/directory.html
©2024 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. The Kyocera logo is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.